Home

Lincoln 2008 Mark LT Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s air bag system One time disable If at any time the driver front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the Belt Minder feature for that seating position the Belt Minder is disabled for the current ignition cycle The Belt Minder feature will re enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds Confirmation is not given for the one time disable Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park automatic transmission e The ignition switch is in the OFF position e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled 154 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints While the design allows you
2. 74 interior laMPS sisssssssrsessrssssis 76 replacing bulbs 78 81 Lane change indicator see Turn signal 75 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 217 Load WMits 255 sisssciscisesdesivenesiease 200 324 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Loading instructions 206 Locks AUCOLOCK niies sanirim 121 CHildproOf nee 123 AOOLS oinean aE a 121 Lubricant specifications 313 NGS NULS snanta 257 Lumbar support seats 137 M Message center 102 103 english metric button 107 system check button 106 warning Messages i e e 108 AYE a OI E RE E A 90 91 automatic dimming rearview IITON seinra E Ei 91 fold away ss iesatvecestaxetearssnciexsavacess 92 heated saiaren EER 93 programmable memory 126 138 side view mirrors power 91 Sien al Seo EE 93 MOON TOO ee 98 Motorcraft parts 278 295 312 N Navigation system ceeee 67 o Octane Latin scernrnnie 299 Oil see Engine oil 0 284 P Parking brake sperosssssssinoire 218 Parts see Motorcraft parts 3812 Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor 142 Power distribution box see FUSES sissiiccsctarsecaseren sees 244 Power door locks ccccce 121 Power MUIFTOPS cigieecsiecteccesseserecdacs 91 POW DOING vcsscsssecsscassaccssssvacssdaces 86 Power steer
3. If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage 94 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Resuming a set speed Press the RESUME control and release it This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed CST SET Increasing speed while using speed control There are two ways to set a higher speed e Press and hold the SET control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the SET control to operate the Tap Up function Press and release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET control OFF ON eid if Reducing speed while using speed control There are two ways to reduce a set speed e Press and hold the CST coast control until you get to the desired speed then release the control You can also use the CST control to operate the Tap Down function Press and release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts by 1 mph 1 6 km h 95 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls e Depress the
4. The front glass on the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen may break when hit with a hard surface If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion Give full attention to driving and to the road Pull off the road in a safe place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system A remote control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the FES functions without distracting the driver Do not expose the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive periods of time Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment System FES Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords and or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and or cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation of seats and or compartments Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and or cables when not in use Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers Do not blow on them or allow them to get wet or dirty Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene paint th
5. such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood e Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 320 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus A Accessory delay cccccccccccceseeees 90 Air cleaner filter 0 310 312 Air conditioning 0 0 68 Airbag supplemental restraint SYS LET roAa 156 157 and child safety seats 159 GESCTIPTION cceeesesceeeseeeees 15 disposal sarreron iiin 161 driver airbag ssipeciresis 157 160 indicator light 2 0 161 OPeVatiONn wees 157 160 passenger airbag 157 160 Ambulance packages 00 8 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 289 Anti lock brake system see Brakes isie 217 Anti theft system
6. the message center The range of zone values are from 01 to 15 and wraps back to 01 7 To exit the zone setting mode and to lock in your change press BESET FAR CAL and release the RESET control INEO TO EXIT Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 8 Press the RESET control to start the compass calibration function CIRCLE SLOWLY 9 Slowly drive the vehicle in a TG CALIBRATE circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED It will take up to five circles to complete calibration 104 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 10 The compass is now calibrated CALIBRATION COMPLETED Average fuel economy AFE Select this function from the INFO menu to display your average fuel VY V 7 economy in miles gallon or liters 100 XXX MPG km NW 868888 mi If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing gallons of fuel used by 100 miles traveled kilometers traveled by liters used your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service sta
7. 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type 306 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal SIMAR operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSMISSION FLUID 7 MIN Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating temperature approximately 20 miles 30 km If your vehicle has been operated for an extended period at
8. How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater system may consume anywhere between 400 watts or 1000 watts of energy per hour Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately 3 hours of operation Block heater operation longer than 3 hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity 216 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light BRAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti lock Braking System ABS This system helps you maintain ste
9. OFF LOCK position 2 Automatic disarming Switching the ignition to the 3 ON position with a coded key disarms the vehicle Replacement keys If your keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be very costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle Only SecuriLock keys can be used To program a coded key yourself you will need two previously programmed coded keys Keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare coded key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 133 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 1 Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the 3 ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 OFF LOCK position to the 3 2 ON position maintain igni
10. The cargo management system consists of the Cargo rail package with the following as optional accessories e Front load bar if equipped e Cross bars if equipped e Bed divider if equipped e Side mounted tool bins Gf equipped 114 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Cargo rail package The strong extruded aluminum double channel rails and four adjustable cleats are designed to hold loads up to 600 Ib 272 kg per cleat maximum of two cleats per rail e Cleat positions are adjusted by pulling the knob and turning slightly to lock open The cleat can then be moved along the rail Once the desired position is reached return the knob to the horizontal position Pull the cleat side to side to ensure it has locked into the next available hole location e To remove cleat from rail release rail endcap by pulling inboard and towards the end of the rail on the two plastic tabs located inside the tracks at each end of the rails The plastic endcap will then release and may be removed The cleat can then be slid out the end of the rail When installing cleat reverse instructions above Note When replacing a cleat into the rail make sure the oval embossed on the knob is not upside down This will ensure that the cleat is properly oriented to accept accessory attachments 115 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Front load bar S
11. e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle i e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a cha
12. USA fus Roadside Emergencies When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loose particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces JUMP STARTING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capability Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause tr
13. level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application e Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts 290 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield e Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant or equivalent me
14. s body during frontal collisions This helps increase the effectiveness of the 143 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front outboard safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management retractors section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The Restraints Control Module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors and the driver seat position sensor In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster
15. 67 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL ATC SYSTEM WITH HEATED SEATS Oar 4 Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius using the message center refer to Units Fahrenheit Celsius in the Driver Controls chapter MAX A C For maximum cooling performance press 7s A C cS N and set the temperature to 60 F 16 C and the highest blower setting 68 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls 1 GW Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice To exit WY select another mode 2 Fan speed control Press to manually increase or decrease the fan speed To return to automatic fan operation press AUTO 3 A RGY Rear defroster if equipped Press to defrost the rear window Refer to Rear window defroster in this section for more information If your vehicle is equipped with both rear defroster and heated mirrors the same button will activate both 3 B Heated mirrors if equipped Press to activate deactivate This feature will remove ice and snow from the side view mirrors 4 Passenger heated seat control Press to heat the passenger seat Press once to activate high heat two indicator lights Press again to activate low heat one in
16. Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror Your vehicle is equipped with an interior rear view mirror and a driver s side exterior mirror that has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high ss reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the interior mirror When the interior mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle the interior rear view mirror and the driver s side exterior mirror will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirrors will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products Note If equipped with a Reverse Camera System a video image will display in the mirror when the vehicle is put in R reverse As you shift into any other gear from R Reverse the image will remain for a few seconds and then turn off Refer to Reverse Camera System in the Driving chapter EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors i To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2
17. Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB To initiate a claim with the BBB AUTO LINE you will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them You will then be mailed a Customer Claim Form that you will need to complete provide proof of vehicle ownership sign and return the Customer Claim Form to the BBB Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation 268 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by
18. INTERIOR LAMPS Map lamps To turn on the map lamps press the control next to each lamp Rear map lamp if equipped The rear map lamp lights are located on the end of the overhead rail system The map lamp lights when any door is not completely closed the instrument panel switch is pushed past the detent and when any of the remote entry controls are pressed while the ignition is off Courtesy reading cargo lamps if equipped The dome portion of the lamp the center light can be turned on when the panel dimmer control is rotated fully up or when any door is T opened _ The dome lamp will stay on if the control is moved to the passenger C Gz side position When the control is in the middle position the lamp will ee only come on when a door is opened If the control is moved to the driver s side position the lamp will not come on at all With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position the rear dome lamp can be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control 76 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp Condensation The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure When moist air enters the headlamp s through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur This condensation is normal and will clear within 45 minutes of headlamp operation Using the right bulbs Replacement bulbs are
19. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life e Rear Wheel Drive RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram YN NVANAANN LA AAAS AS So VV NVNAANA YN AVANAAA _ gt Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires 189 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as
20. LOW OIL PRESSURE Displayed when the engine oil pressure is low If this warning message is displayed check the level of the engine oil Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for information about adding engine oil If the oil level is OK and this warning persists shut down the engine immediately and contact your authorized dealer for service CHECK FUEL CAP Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly installed Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation Refer to Fuel filler cap under the Fuel information section in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on have the system inspected by your authorized dealer 110 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls ENGINE FAIL
21. SHUFFLE SCAN and FOLDER MODE features SCAN To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Press the power button to turn the DVD system on The indicator light next to the power button will meo illuminate 3 Connect an auxiliary audio video source by connecting RCA cords not included to the RCA jacks on the left hand side of the system e Yellow 1 video input e White 2 left channel audio input e Red 8 right channel audio input 7 4 Press MEDIA on the DVD system to change the media source to AUX 41 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 5 Press VIDEO on the DVD system to change the video source to DVD AUX If your source is properly plugged in it will appear on the LCD Liquid Crystal Display screen If your auxiliary source does not have a video signal or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal from the auxiliary source the screen will remain black If the video source is set to DVD AUX the display will automatically turn on if a video signal is detected To listen to audio over the headphones Dual play mode 1 You may listen to channels A and B over wired or wireless headpho
22. When the song appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display e DELETE SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A IV to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A IV to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS 24 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems e DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all song s from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS e ENABLE ALERTS DISABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off Satell
23. be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential harm or damage Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 99 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches PONN 2 8 cm away from the HomeLi
24. before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important safety precautions A computer system controls the engine s idle revolutions per minute RPM When the engine starts the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked If the vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing snow conditions the engine air induction may become partially clogged with snow and or ice If this occurs the engine may experience a significant reduction in power output At the earliest opportunity clear all snow and or ice away from the air induction inlet Do not allow the vehicle to idle for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off 3 Make sure the gearshift is in P Park 213 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving 4 Make sure the parking brake is set 5 Turn the key to 3 ON without turning the key to 4 START Some warn
25. phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert A N Fasten Safety Belt A T Airbag Side fe Child Seat Tether ay il Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System gi EL Master Lighting Switch 6 Ts Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Vas Windshield GY Defrost Demist 10 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist Ad ry gt J 2 OOG ous oe 2 Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Window a Power Window Lockout Front Rear Child Safety Door Interior Lugga
26. snapped into place not slid Overhead Storage Bins J lt iy rS a e When on the overhead rail adjacent bins must be pinned together Bins adjacent to the End Cap must be pinned to the End Cap Bins without pin attachments should not be placed on the overhead rail Failure to pin the bins together can allow the bins to become separated from the rail under certain conditions 84 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Bin Removal Attach and remove bins from the rail using the following instructions Place both palms on the underside of the storage bin avoiding the storage bin door Push upwards with palms 85 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls While pushing upwards with palms grip the side latches with fingers and squeeze N LAA Se With pressure applied with palms and side latches squeezed down pull downward on the entire storage bin and remove ee AK AF eS AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 86 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls The auxiliary p
27. 1 800 521 4140 Away from home If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could provide after following the steps described above contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you In the United States Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 www customersaskford com 265 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance In Canada Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 1 800 565 3673 FORD www ford ca If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle needs service or if you need more help than the authorized dealer could provide after following the steps described above contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealer to help you In the United States Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 1 800 521 4140 TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 www customersaskford com In Canada Lincoln Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 1 800 387 9333 www lincolncanada com In order to help you service your Lincoln v
28. 101 to the wiped area and spread around evenly 3 Apply more Motorcraft cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets and safety belts e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials 277 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s seatbelts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing LEATHER SEATS Your leather seating surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather e To clean use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 11 A Dry the area with a so
29. 18 kg 167 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition The importance of shoulder belis Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat the safest place for children to ride Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat Never put the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision 168 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide
30. 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID Check the power steering fluid Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the service interval schedules 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right several times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range
31. 294 Family entertainment system 38 Floor MatS 5 ssdsseacissdivwshesiess 111 Fluid capacities 00 313 FoglaMPS esir 72 Four Wheel Drive vehicles 230 driving off road eee 232 electronic shift 231 indicator light 231 preparing to drive your VENICIES wssscssessigeissszescstgapedesestsans 220 Felipino aaa 295 calculating fuel ECONOMY sets scascvccrscedevaceiees 105 300 CAD EE A E E 297 CAPACI ceciren a aa 313 choosing the right fuel 298 comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates 0 0 0 0 303 detergent in fuel 299 filling your vehicle with PUG 555 secssetchasetsisecviedis 295 297 300 filter specifications 295 312 fuel pump shut off switch 242 improving fuel economy 300 OCTANE rating spissi 299 316 quality peeso nee nee 299 running out of fuel 00 000 299 safety information relating to automotive fuels 295 Fuel pump shut off switch 242 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index FUSES woeeeeecccecsceseseseeeesteeeeees 243 244 G Gas cap see Fuel cap 297 Gas mileage see Fuel economy sses 300 GAUGES wectessissistesscaccsssdeeseandes 16 H Hazard flashers ccccceeeeees 242 Head restraints 0 0 135 139 Headlamps restons 72 AMINE siccvcssesnnes seosnncdaereeceverscaneces 74 autolamp system c c00cee 72 bulb specifications 0 0 77 daytime runn
32. 5 seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play 29 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To auto load up to 6 discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once all discs are loaded the last loaded disc will begin to play Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for further information 18 amp CD eject To eject a disc from the system press amp Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc If only one disc is in the system press A To auto eject up to 6 CDs press and hold 4 until the system begins ejecting all loaded discs If the discs are not removed the system will reload the discs 19 CD slot Insert a CD MP3 label S377 side up 30 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Auxiliary input jack Line in Your vehi
33. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Safety restraints precautions Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips 144 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit in the back seat where they can be properly restrained Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is
34. APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR Compliance Certification Label is EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE located on the structure B Pillar TE aa t poo by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s UO ANT OM AN A ITA door EXT PNT _ XX RCXX D30 WB BRK TINTTR PPS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXK XXXX XXXXXXX XX Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number 317 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint System O 3 Vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number TRANSMISSION TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission transaxle code on the MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO f ificati DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Safety Compliance Certification FRONT GAWR XXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB Label The following table tells you XXXXKG WTH XXXXKG WITH which transmission or transaxle noo Fy Aa RES each code represents AT XXX kPa XX PSLCOLD 4
35. Controls Side mounted tool bins Watertight bins can be positioned at any point along the side rails and can be easily removed even when full and carried to wherever the contents are needed Each bin will hold up to 60 lb 27 kg of cargo and has a drain plug for use as a cooler The lock cylinder is keyed to the first ignition key to be turned in the lock This allows one key to work all bins even if more are ordered through the dealer The dealer will usually key the locks during pre delivery but if necessary simply remove the sticker covering the keyhole insert ignition key and turn to the extent of travel in each direction This key will then be the only key to unlock the bin e Once the key has been set simply turn the key to the right to lock or to the left to unlock When locked the push button will not depress when pushed e To remove the bin from the rail open lid and pull up on both levers located on the outboard edge next to the pickup box top rail until the handles are all the way up approximately 90 degrees Once both handles are raised the lid may be closed Note Windows in the lid will allow the handles to stick up above the lid with the lid closed After closing the lid simply lift up and inboard away from the pickup box side to release bin from rail e To install reverse the above instructions Note Place the bin as far forward in the bed as possible to provide the smoothest and safest ride for your
36. If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Pass Airbag Off Empty seat Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the back seat After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor 163 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects that are in th
37. If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible 250 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and should not be used Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size
38. In Track Mode pressing lt q SEEK SEEK gt will scroll through all tracks on the disc In Folder mode pressing lt q SEEK SEEK Pe will scroll only through tracks within the selected folder COMPRESS Compression Available only in CD MP3 mode Press MENU until COMPRESS ON OFF appears in the display Use W lt SEEK SEEK to toggle ON OFF When COMPRESS is ON the system will bring soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level 26 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through FES DVD if equipped oA LINE IN Auxiliary audio mode SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes Satellite Radio if equipped For location and further information on the auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 5 SEEK In radio mode press l lt P to access the lt seEK 2 previous next strong station In CD mode press A gt to access the previous next CD track In satellite radio mode if equipped press lt q SEEK SEEK P to seek to the previous next channel If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press lt
39. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place 91 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Memory feature The power side view mirror positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door Gf equipped with memory feature Refer to Memory seats mirrors adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Fold away mirrors Fold the side mirrors in carefully before driving through a narrow space like an automatic car wash Powerfold mirrors if equipped With powerfold mirrors you can fold gy the side mirrors using the power mirror switch 1 Rotate the switch to the center neutral position 2 Momentarily pull the switch rearward to auto fold in 3 Momentarily pull the switch rearward again to fold back to design position The powerfold mirrors may be moved inward outward manually However if a mirror is moved manually it will need to be reset A mirror which has not been reset may appear to be loose To reset with the switch in the center position momentarily pull the switch rearward to fold the mirrors in An audible click will be heard indicating re synchronization If the click is
40. Using a T25 Torx driver remove two Torx head bolts from bottom and slide end support off of aluminum extrusion Insert accessory into desired T slot and install end support When tightening Torx head bolts hand tightening with a Torx driver is sufficient DO NOT over torque by using a ratchet 117 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Bed divider This panel will keep small items up to 400 lb 180 kg in position in the pickup box Also includes T slots to allow attachment of industry standard roof rack accessories To remove bed divider lift handle on each side and lift end support shroud off of the cleat To install bed divider align cleats directly across from each other on the lower rail Then place divider end support onto the cleats and press down on each side until the latch handle cycles up then press the handle down to secure pull up on the divider to ensure they are securely attached To install accessories into T slots remove bed divider then find the slip joint end indicated with an arrow embossed on the support Using a T25 Torx driver remove two Torx head bolts and slide end support off of the aluminum extrusion Insert accessory into desired T slot and install end support When tightening Torx head bolts hand tightening with a Torx driver is sufficient DO NOT over torque by using a ratchet 118 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver
41. When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes SNOWPLOWING Your vehicle is not recommended for snowplowing Ford makes no representation as to the suitability of your vehicle for snowplowing in particular regarding the potential for exceeding vehicle weight limits airbag SRS deployment sensitivity vehicle crash integrity or powertrain durability The Snowplow Package Option is not available 239 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles
42. ZC 8 A Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant U S only ZC 40 A Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A 278 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner U S only ZC 11 A Motorcraft Leather Care Kit ZC 11 D Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth Mitt ZC 47 Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft One Step Wash and Wax Concentrate ZC 6 A Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Triple Clean U S only ZC 13 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 279 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide to find out which parts and services
43. a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufacturing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the large
44. and AWD Systems if equipped A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD when selected has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot 178 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Driving chapter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4WD while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD vehicles Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles SUV and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your v
45. and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire 251 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capab
46. approximately 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON The Belt Minder feature is activated and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph 152 2008 Mark LT mit The Belt Minder feature will not activate The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled The Belt Minder feature is suspended the safety belt warning light remains illuminated but the warning chime does not sound This time does not count towards the 5 minute expiration time Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All statistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare events 36700 crashes occur every day The more we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 mi
47. are covered Use only recommended fuels lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning cigarettes material away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 280 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD m gt 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located on the fr
48. are more susceptible to damage from heat light and stress than are regular CDs Always insert and remove a disc by holding the disc flat with the playing surface facing down in order to prevent damage to the disc or the player Never insert any object other than a compact disc CD or digital versatile disc DVD into the player as doing so may damage the player and may cause injury to you Do not disassemble the player The laser used in disc playback is extremely harmful to the eyes 59 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems The FES DVD system is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm 4 75 in audio compact discs and digital versatile discs DVD only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD and DVD players Irregular shaped CDs or DVDs CDs or DVDs with a scratch protection film attached and CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the FES DVD system The label may peel and cause the CD or DVD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs or DVDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ball point pens may damage CDs or DVDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Playing a DVD 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the navigation system is
49. brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached OFF ON press the SET control nil Turning off speed control There are two ways to turn off the speed control e Depress the brake pedal This will not erase your vehicle s previously set speed if RESUME is then selected the vehicle will return to the previously set speed e Press the speed control OFF control This will erase your on vehicle s previously set speed Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased CST SET Hila STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS A Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use steering wheel controls and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control features 96 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Audio control features Press 49 to select e AM FM1 FM2 if equipped e CD if equipped e FES DVD if equipped e SATI SAT2 or SATS Satellite atone Radio mode if equipped e AUX IN LINE Gf equipped In AM FM1 or FM2 mode e Press and release SEEK to select the next preset station or pr
50. cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines if equipped INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS Clean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean and damp white cotton cloth then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth you may also use Motorcraft Dash amp Vinyl Cleaner ZC 38 A on the instrument panel and interior trim areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection 276 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Apply Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner ZC 11 A In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC
51. cc 132 arming the system 008 133 Audio system see Radio 19 23 Automatic transmission driving an automatic OVETOTIVE aaiae 223 fluid adding 0 0 ees 307 fluid checking ceee 307 fluid refill capacities 313 fluid specification 313 Auxiliary input jack Line in 31 Axle lubricant specifications 313 refill capacities 0000000000000 313 traction JOK ssrrssisaiie tnis 220 B Battery i ccscsscssinetencseigchedeeacteaes 287 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index acid treating emergencies 287 jumping a disabled battery 258 maintenance free seee 287 replacement specifications 312 SOT VICING six cisceaveerdenasnacasacieadetest 287 Belt Minder wees 151 deactivating activating the Belt Minder woe 154 Booster seats cccccccccceeeeees 166 Brake ccccccccesseseeseeeeseesseesseeeees 217 AMOC e E 217 anti lock brake system ABS warning light ssisisresisriiiiiirs 217 fluid checking and adding 307 fluid refill capacities 313 fluid specifications 313 lubricant specifications 313 PATA carcerarie an 218 shift interlock 221 BUDS eeen n AE AET 77 C Capacities for refilling fluids 313 Cargo GaBe akini irern 113 Cargo management system 114 Cell phone USE oo eeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeees 9 Changing a tire cinsinde 250 Child safety restrain
52. collision To properly adjust your head restraints lift the head restraint so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position as possible 139 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The head restraints can be moved up and down Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head LD Push control to lower head restraint Folding up the rear seats The rear seat has a split 60 40 cushion Each seat cushion can be flipped up into the seatback position 1 Pull control to release seat cushion 2 Rotate seat cushion up until it locks into vertical storage position 140 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Returning the seat to seating position Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 1 Pull control on the side of the seat to release seat cushion from storage position 2 Push seat cushion down until it locks into horizontal position SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
53. color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar spots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer 274 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup k
54. crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor Front crash severity sensor e Front passenger sensing system Passenger Airbag Off indicator light Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors Restraint system warning light and back up tone The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners front safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor and indicator lights 141 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant classification and conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM may activate t
55. daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 20 7 kPa for a drop of 30 F 16 6 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If 199 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle The original equipment tires on your vehicle have an all weather tread design to provide traction handling and braking performance in year round driving You may install snow tires for improved traction when driving in areas with sustained periods of snow or icy driving conditions If you choose to install snow tires on your vehicle they must be the same size construction and load range as the original tires listed on the tire placard and they must be installed on all four wheels Mixing tires of different size or construction on your vehicle can advers
56. engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 36 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may c
57. equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts If your vehicle is not equipped with a heavy duty trailer towing package the maximum weight your vehicle can tow is limited to 5 000 Ib 2 268 kg Your vehicle s load capacity is designated by weight not by volume so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle 206 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension Inspect these components carefully periodically during and after any towing operation Exceeding the maximum GCWR could result in extensive damage to your vehicle and personal injury Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury 4x2 139 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 14 500 6577 9 000 4082 4x2 151 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ilb kg trailer weight lb kg 14500 G57 8900 4037 4x4 139 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ilb kg trailer weight lb k
58. filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in personal injury Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that are blended with a maximum of 85 ethanol The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Do not use fuel containing methanol It can damage critical fuel system components Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Studies indicate that these additives can cause your vehicle s emission control system to deteriorate more rapidly Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty 298 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Octane recommendations Your vehicle is designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline with pump R M 2 octane rating of 87 We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as Regular that a are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high al
59. fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in reverse and when using the RSS This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps 226 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet 2 meters from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a war
60. front seatback using the manual recliner e Lift and hold the handle located on the side of the seat e Lean against the seatback to adjust it to your desired position You can recline the seat back or bring it forward Release the handle when the desired position has been reached 136 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Using the manual lumbar support For more lumbar support turn the A lumbar support control toward the front of vehicle For less lumbar support turn the l lumbar support control toward the rear of vehicle 4 Adjusting the front power seat A Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving fp Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a collision or sudden stop A Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor 137 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002
61. fus Entertainment Systems e SEEK Press to advance to the previous lt Q or next er DVD chapters e II Press to play a DVD or to pause the DVD When the radio displays DVD MENU press PLAY on the radio memory preset 6 to play the disc Parental control for the DVD system Your Family Entertainment System FES allows you to have control over the rear seat controls in a few different ways The DVD system is automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is ON which allows the rear seat passengers to use the DVD system There are three levels of control of the FES buttons The states are JIWDWIWL FULL enabled LOCAL or LOCKED disabled To change the level of control press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls The control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously The three states are described as FULL enabled The FES has control over the primary speaker and secondary headphone audio sources LOCAL The FES has control over the secondary source headphones only The radio will ignore button presses that affect the primary speaker audio source LOCKED disabled The FES buttons are locked and all FES button presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject When the DVD system is ON you can then press the memory preset CJ CJ CJ ED CJ o controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between Single Play a
62. headphones Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the headphones Batteries are included Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with the system Also wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system Refer to Wired Headphones below 50 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To install the batteries remove the screw at the bottom of the cover Then lightly press down on top and slide the cover off When replacing the batteries use two new batteries alkaline recommended and install them with the correct orientation as indicated in the battery housing 51 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To operate the headphones e Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones A red indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON Press POWER again to turn the headphones off Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the headband adjustment Select the desired audio source Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B selection switch on the ear piece e Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use After approximately one minute of not being in use no infrared signal is received the wireless hea
63. hold FF to manually advance in a CD MP3 track While in folder mode press lt q FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available While in folder mode press FOLDER gt to access the next folder on MP3 discs if available 21 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle a mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In track mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder Press B gt 11_ play pause when a CD MP3 is playing to pause the disc CD PAUSE will appear in the display Press again to resume play 4 For a single cd system press amp to eject the current disc a The display will read CD EJECT For an in dash six CD system press amp Select the correct slot number using memory presets 1 6 When ready the system will eject the disc and the display will read REMOVE CD If the disc is not removed in 15 seconds the system will reload the disc To auto eject up to 6 discs press and hold amp until the system begins ejecting all load
64. ieis 181 CREAM WAP sensrssiis 181 185 TOWNE siveisceassseedeavnesncsverieeisestieng 206 recreational towing 05 211 trailer tOWINY ee ees 206 326 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Traction Control cceeeeeees 218 Traction lok rear axle 220 Transfer case fluid checking 309 TRANSMISSION dxssscesdtascdesaeatexadteck 221 brake shift interlock BSI 221 fluid checking and adding CAULOMALIC cercen errak 307 fluid refill capacities 313 lubricant specifications 313 Turn SIGNAL eccepeveis hichodptadiaxiercess 75 Vv Vehicle Identification Number VIN aun EEan EE 317 Vehicle loading cceee 200 Ventilating your vehicle 215 WwW Warning lights see Lights 12 Washer fluid c cc eccccceeeseees 283 Water Driving through 239 Windows POWED sriid srscssececchdendesstadiaceed 88 power down back window 89 Windshield washer fluid and WIPETS wikien naoa paanan 82 checking and adding fluid 283 replacing wiper blades 283 327 328
65. it click shut Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly 244 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses To reduce risk of electrical shock always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box and Auxiliary Relay Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter njje F Relay R03 Relay R06 Relay R02 Relay R05 Relay R01 Relay R04 Relay 201 m The fuses are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Location Rating Panel Description elay 203 R N 37 107 106 104 SEE OWNER S MANUAL 117 113 i Instrument cluster 2 20A Stop Turn lamps Brake on off switch Hazard flashers 245 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Panel Description pedals Driver power seat mirror 5 7 5A Keep alive memory for Powertrain Control Module PCM and climate control module ee ee eer panel illumination 8 0A Heated mirrors Switch indicator Pp 20A Fuel pump relay Fuel injectors 10 20A Trailer tow back up lamps relay PCB1 Trailer tow parklamp relay R201 A C clutch 4x4 solenoid PCM relay coil 13 10A Climate c
66. its heating position when it is ready to be used Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty Ashtray The ashtray is located on the instrument panel To open ashtray push in on the door and release The ashtray assembly will tip out To close push assembly in completely and release POWER WINDOWS Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves A When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings 88 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Press and hold the bottom part of the rocker switch to open the window Press and hold the top part of the rocker switch to close the window Rear Window Buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise This noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to three inches Window lock The window lock feature allows only the driver to operate the power windows To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the left side of the control One touch down Allows the driver s window to open fully without holding the control down Press completely down on th
67. listen to the radio however they will be limited to listening to the same radio channel Press q on the DVD player to am listen to audio over the headphones The headphone control will now be active and a green light next to the A or B headphone control buttons will illuminate The system can output two different audio sources over the headphones These are called Channel A and Channel B Both Channel A and Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones not included or on the infrared CIR wireless headphones Press the Headphone Control button A to change the audio source for Channel A Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel A This wom information will display on the DVD system screen Press the Headphone Control button B to change the audio source for Channel B Press MEDIA to change the audio source for Channel B This information will display on the DVD system screen Channel B can listen to either the DVD media or the DVD system auxiliary inputs DVD AUX 54 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Operation with an aftermarket audio system Headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the Family Entertainment System will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode While operating in Headphone Only
68. more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 86 C Coolant concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester 014 R1060 The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Enables calibrated gauges to work properly 289 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir COLD FILL RANGE e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD
69. not heard use the switch to fold the mirrors out then in until the click is heard After that the mirrors will operate normally until they are again moved manually Note Ten or more switch activations within 1 minute or repeated folding unfolding of the mirrors while holding the switch rearward during the full travel may cause the system to disable the fold unfold function to protect motors from overheating Should this occur wait approximately 3 minutes for the system to reset and function to return to normal 92 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Heated outside mirrors Heated mirrors remove ice mist and fog To activate the heated mirrors press the rear defrost button PGY located on the climate control panel NT Refer to Rear window defrost in the Climate Controls chapter for more information On vehicles not equipped with rear defrost press the heated mirror wy Y control located on the climate control panel refer to the Climate Controls chapter for more information Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator When the vehicle turn signal is activated the lower portion of the mirror housing will blink This feature provides an indicator to the driver that the vehicle turn signa
70. of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 100 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming During programming your hand held transmitter may AT automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Step 1 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating e Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been a
71. on 3 Insert a DVD label side up into the system 4 Use the DVD bezel controls to Press to play or pause a DVD Press to stop or eject a DVD Press and release to go to the previous chapter Press and hold for a fast reverse search Press and release to go to the next chapter Press and hold for a fast forward search Press when not in menu mode to adjust brightness or when in menu mode to navigate through the menu selections 60 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Press to adjust volume levels Slow play 1 With a DVD playing press pause a 2 Press and hold the reverse or advance button to enter into slow play mode Once in slow play mode press and release the reverse or advance button repeatedly to cycle through 1 4 and 1 2 These will display on the status bar on top of the screen as the screens cycle through at this rate Frame by frame 1 With a DVD playing press pause a 2 Press the right cursor button The DVD will advance one frame Each press of the right cursor button will advance the DVD video by one frame Headphone auxiliary jacks There are wired headphones not included and auxiliary jacks on the left and right side of your DVD system They can be used to plug in wired headphones or to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices such as game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc 61 200
72. one touch open feature Press and release the L control The moon roof will open to the comfort position Press and release the control again to fully open To stop the one touch open feature press either the or vy control again To close the moon roof The moon roof is equipped with an automatic one touch express closing feature Press and release the v front portion of the control To stop motion at any time during the one touch closing press the control again To vent the moon roof Press and hold the vy control The moon roof must be in the closed position in order to move it into the vent position To close press and hold the control until the glass panel stops moving 98 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls The moon roof has a built in sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut To close the shade pull it toward the front of the vehicle HOMELINK WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to A replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in O O device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate
73. or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to Compass zone calibration adjustment 103 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Compass zone calibration adjustment 1 Determine your magnetic zone by referring to the zone map 2 Turn ignition to the ON position 3 Start the engine 4 From Info menu select the Compass Odometer function Do not select Trip DTE or AFE The top of the message center must be blank 5 Press and hold the SETUP and N RESET controls until the message BESET FOR ZONE center display changes to show the INEO TO EXIT current zone setting XX C WISER 4 6 Press the RESET then press gt SETUP control repeatedly until the SETUP ZONE XX correct zone setting for your 7 N geographic location is displayed on C RESET IF DONE J
74. post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Child and infant or child safety seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision When installing a child safety seat Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag Supplemental Restraint System section in this chapter Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to prevent accidental unbuckling Place seat back in upright position Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to Automatic locking mode passenger side front and rear seating positions if equipped 169 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e L
75. q Reverse Press and release for the previous chapter or track Press and hold to reverse search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 4 P Fast forward Press and release for the next chapter or track Press and hold to forward search a DVD Video CD or FES CD in DVD CD mode 5 B gt 11_ Play Pause Press Play to select DVD mode and to turn the DVD system on if it is off If a disc is present it will resume or begin to play Press Pause while playing a disc to pause a DVD or CD 6 On Off Press to turn the DVD system On Off 44 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 7 VIDEO Press repeatedly to cycle through the following video state options which will be indicated on the bottom right hand corner of the display DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD and Off no indicator If you select the DVD AUX video source the display will turn off if there is no video signal detected When a video signal is detected on the auxiliary video input and the display is in the DVD AUX video mode the display will automatically turn on 8 Infrared IR Receiver amp Transmitter System sensor which reads the signals from the remote control and sends audio signals to the infrared IR wireless headphones 9 LCD screen The eight inch diagonal screen rotates down to view and up into housing to store when not in use Ensure that the screen is latched into the housing when being sto
76. q SEEK SEEK B gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category Press and hold lt q SEEK SEEK B gt to fast seek through the previous next channels In TEXT MODE press lt Q SEEK SEEK P gt to view the previous additional display text In CATEGORY MODE press a SEEK SEEK B gt to select a category Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 6 gt I1 OK Play Pause This control is operational in CD and DVD mode if equipped When a CD or DVD is playing in the FES system press this control to play or pause the current CD DVD The CD DVD status will display in the radio display OK Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features For further information refer to the SYNC supplement If your vehicle is equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES please refer to the Family Entertainment DVD system later in this chapter 27 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 7 SHUFFLE In CD MP3 mode press SHUFFLE to engage shuffle mode SHUFFLE ON will appear in the display If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press SEEK to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing CD SHUF will appear in the display To disengage press SHUFFLE again SHUFFLE OFF will appear in the display Note In tra
77. rearward from the tailgate pillar to disengage two hidden snap in retainers 4 Remove bulb socket from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise 5 Pull bulb straight out of socket and press in the new bulb Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing high mount brake and cargo lamp bulbs Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position 1 Remove the two screws and move ol the lamp assembly away from the O vehicle to expose the bulb sockets c 4 2N Y i 2 Remove the bulb socket by rotating counterclockwise and pulling it out of the lamp assembly 3 Pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb Install the new bulbs in reverse order Replacing fog lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position r 2 Remove the bulb socket from the fog lamp by turning counterclockwise 3 Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb Install the new bulb in reverse order Replacing exterior mounted mirror turn signal indicator lamp bulbs For bulb replacement see your authorized dealer 80 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Replacing license plate lamp bulbs The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper To change the license plate lamp bulbs 1 Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb 2 Twist the bulb socket counterclockwise and carefully pull t
78. reimbursement e travel planning benefits Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 521 4140 Canadian customers who require roadside assistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford or Mercury vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 521 4140 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 Roadside coverage beyond basic warranty In the United States you may purchase additional roadside assistance coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting your authorized dealer or by calling 1 800 FORD CLUB Similarly in Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollm
79. release pressure before the jack can be removed from the holder Removing the spare tire 1 Use the ignition key to remove the lock cylinder from the access hole of the bumper to allow access to the guide tube Assemble the jack handle as shown in the illustration re a 2 Fully insert the jack handle through the bumper hole and into the guide tube through the access hole in the rear bumper 3 Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground the tire can be slid rearward and the cable is slightly slack 4 Slide the retainer through the center of the wheel 253 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Tire change procedure To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure the parking brake is set then block Gn both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Refer to the instruction sheet located with the jack for detailed tire change instructions 1 Park on a level surface activate hazard flashers and set the parking brake 2 Place gearshift lever in P Park and turn
80. system OFF The indicator light will turn off indicating the system is off Note The audio from the DVD system will play over all vehicle speakers and can be adjusted by the radio volume control To play a CD in the DVD system The DVD system can play audio CDs CD R and CD R W CD ROM and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints and scratches Clean the disc with a soft cloth wiping from the center to the edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert a CD into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and automatically begin to play If there is already a CD in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and the CD Audio Disc screen will display From this screen you can also select from COMPRESSION SHUFFLE and SCAN features 40 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems To play an MP3 disc in the DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert an MP3 disc into the system label side up to turn on the DVD system It will load and automatically begin to play If there is already a disc in the system press PLAY on the DVD player 3 The disc will begin to play and DVD MP3 FOLDER TRACK 00 24 O the MP3 Audio Disc screen will display and allow you to access the COMPRESSION
81. than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual 1b kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 193 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Ti
82. that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 3 km of the disablement location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 3 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 3 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services 240 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense
83. the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants like infants 142 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints in rear facing child seats this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way bac
84. the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1400 1100 150 150 lb Yes you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 Ib 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 Ib 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the 205 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 lb 99 kg the calculation would be 1400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1400 440 1200 240 Ib No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg
85. the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts 150 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the ON warning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the ON position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activati
86. the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e achild or a small person occupies the front passenger seat The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or C PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel just above the radio Note The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the ON position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the indicator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passen
87. then pull it straight out Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Install the new bulb in reverse order 78 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing front parking lamp turn signal sidemarker bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood 2 At the top and inboard side of the headlamp peel the protective cover back from the lower screws and loosen the three retaining screws 3 Once the three retaining screws have been removed disengage the tab at the top center of the headlamp assembly by lifting it up 4 Slide the headlamp assembly forward disconnecting the snap attachment at the fender 5 Remove bulb socket from the lamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise and then pull the bulb straight out Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing tail brake turn signal backup lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp control is in the OFF position 2 Open the tailgate to expose the lamp assembly bolts and remove the two bolts from the tail lamp assembly 79 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights 3 Carefully pull the lamp assembly straight
88. 000 317 Satellite Radio Information 35 SEATS ancsiaescesaaysesidehedeieateeelneeiaedee 135 child safety seats 00000 169 heated secceesinscaveessencssadioethes 68 139 memory Seat 126 138 SecuriLock passive anti theft SVSUCIM siainen 132 133 Servicing your vehicle 280 Setting the clock AM FM In dash 6 CD 0005 25 SnNoOwplowing ceeeeees 8 239 Spare tire see Changing the Tire 253 Spark plugs Specifications oessa 312 316 Special notice ambulance conversions 8 utility type vehicles 0 0 7 325 Index Specification chart 1118 or 01 ts eee 3138 Speed Control ccccceeeeeeeenees 94 Starting your vehicle 212 214 jump Starting oe 258 Steering wheel COMUTPOIS arriya iai ioniga 96 CIUNE rerne ea Orr y NS 82 T MAIS AGE seeria ener 112 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 195 Ai E 180 181 250 alignment c 0s scsscnrsscarcssessesscene 189 CALE I ANT 185 changing sirerciiiss 250 253 254 checking the pressure 185 ndate esoe ee ea a EEr 182 label eae e Cesemteor aes 194 replacing serres pareser 186 YOUAUIN Gay cavticctsestsabecaccvactesunees 189 safety practices cccceeee 188 sidewall information 190 snow tires and chains 200 spare TNE sas accdedsa daxtsernsesteaes 251 terminology orestes tss 182 tire grades Gurenrseise
89. 008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached 4 A P CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum num
90. 0J OW Jequnu 1ed pIo J0 oWweU Ied pIo 4 PU GL 6 PME Oxe Tey V c6TOGWTISM TO OVIMGLAX Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 Mark LT mlt USA fus 314 Maintenance and Specifications QORJANS OAV L UO IPA oY YPM JO ATF Y JO UI0 0q 0 SVI T JSULIJ Y SUT Aq poututejzep st Ajoedeo Yor IIMS aseulep uoIsstusuely osned few PIN PoOpUsUTUIOIEL y UeY 19470 PINT Aue JO sN BAIOYUL IIMI S D910 OY DUTULIOJAP 0 WOMIDUAO UL BIUNUAIUIDUL PAINPIYIS 0 I JOY aseurep UOISSTUISULIJ osned feu pInF pepusuTUodeI y uey 19440 pm Aue Jo SN A egNOOUAW eNOOUAWN esesn enp poyioeds st yey PMI 10 PMJ A eNOOUAW OSN Auo pmoys A eNOOUAW ember Jey SUOISSTUISUBI OTJVWOINY y osuel SuTjetodo ewou S yOrsdIp y UO uoneompur ayy Aq jes oq pmoys eae pmj pue pmyy uotsstursues Jo yunowe 3y Settoedeo Jafooo Areyrxne souly gSuooo QZIS SI J009 a T W JSs s SUT OOD pmyy UOTssTuUsUeI pue uoneondde a oTYaA UO p seq AIA ILM sotoedes Jor Tenjoe ureysAs SUO0 pny uorssrusueI sutpnpout Ajoedeo py Arp oyeurxoiddy Sopxe JOT UOPLIL YOU G16 JO MY ejo durod 107 W 8TTOZINALSA uorjeoyroods ps0 SUJU JUETeAINbs JO JOYIPO UOT ANPPY JO TU 8TT ZO p PPV QORJANS OAR V UO Y OTYA dy ULM VOY T H ayy JO W0 0q oY MOTE WU FT 9 YOUT 9T 6 P T 0 IKL oy SUMY Aq pounutejzep st Ayoedeo Jer IIMI S IoyeM Ul poSIowqns Useq sey XL Teal oy IWY Aue posueyo aq pmoys yueonqn L oy oyeM UL post
91. 1 First e Provides maximum engine braking e Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever e Will not downshift into 1 First at high speeds allows for 1 First when vehicle reaches slower speeds Forced downshifts e Allowed in D Overdrive or Drive e Depress the accelerator to the floor e Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat 225 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Reverse Sensing System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and
92. 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 112 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 192 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower
93. 12 x 45 kg 685 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you Ne 3 100 Ib 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would e 1400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1400 440 900 60 lb Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 32 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this Owner s Guide Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars Depending upon the type and placement of the load hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle TRAILER TOWING Your vehicle may tow a class I II III or IV trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or
94. 182 195 200 206 211 212 212 217 218 221 240 240 242 242 243 250 257 258 264 265 271 272 273 Table of Contents Maintenance and Specifications 280 Engine compartment 282 Engine oil 284 Battery 287 Engine coolant 289 Fuel information 295 Air filter s 310 Part numbers 312 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 313 Engine data 316 Accessories 319 Index 321 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2007 Ford Motor Company 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perc
95. 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading may result if the engine is left running 300 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Use the same filling rate setting ow medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than three automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Use t
96. 8 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems On the left side of the system is the Headphone A input jack This i 2 3 4 headphone will listen to the media selected on the Channel A source When you need to make any V L R AJA adjustments to the media volume etc ensure that the Channel A source is highlighted For more information refer to Headphone adjustments Also located here are the various auxiliary jacks which can be used to plug in a VCR camcorder video games etc The specific jacks are as follows 1 Yellow video input 2 White left channel audio input 3 Red right channel audio input 4 Black wired headphone jack not included The B headphone jack 5 is located on the right side of the DVD system 5 Plug in wired headphones not included here oes O Note The B headphones can only access DVD and AUX modes They cannot access radio sources Audio displays Your DVD system interacts closely with the front audio system Status messages will appear in the radio display showing the DVD status Some possible radio display messages e SINGLE PLAY or DUAL PLAY e DVD LOAD e DVD MENU e DVD STOP Audio interaction You can then also use the front audio controls to advance reverse play and pause a DVD While a DVD is playing you may use the following controls on the front radio 62 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA
97. ATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48 Ib 22 kg in a child restraint Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 lb 27 kg in a child restraint and to provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 Ib 86 kg using an upper torso harness and a belt positioning booster Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap Install the child safety seat in a seating position with LATCH and tether anchors For more information on top tether straps and anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter For more information of LATCH anchors refer to Attaching safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children attachments in this chapter Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible 170 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Position th
98. Driver Controls While holding the steering wheel pull the lever up to its original position to lock the steering column Never adjust the steering column when the vehicle is moving ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR IF EQUIPPED Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamps CENTER CONSOLE The center console offers several useful storage features These include 1 Cupholders 2 Tissue holder in lid 3 Power point 4 Large utility compartment has Coin holder slots and a Cardholder located inside on the passenger side and a Pen holder on the lid Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision 83 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package The overhead console can come on rails which can be removed by the customer or it can come as a non rail component of the headliner which cannot be removed If your vehicle is equipped with a overhead console rail system there are several features that can be operated 1 To open the bins move the center latch forward which will allow the door to be opened 2 The latches on the side of the bins are to enable the user to remove the bin or add a dealer purchased feature Sliding the bins on the rails may cause damage to the headliner The removable bins are to be
99. GNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle e Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels over the internet U S customers only For information on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously 36 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required ACQUIRING Radio requires more No action required th
100. IRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed A Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before L i touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trawler towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usa
101. JeIIUN IJLIOIOJON asealy oyrT SuoT UNTU punodwioy IIPP PIq pue asealy Jodieg ayeig IUOS JeIN10JOJ asvoly ssoding Tny pM ayelg asp ye 1070W LOC WdueULIOj 1ag YSTH Yeso10j 0 quoTeambea J0 oweU 3 1ed pIo 199 sytenb 0 4 qo usSuy s punq yoo yeys Tepod yerq pue s oard pue soseyuly ayeiq SuryIed SU9S UOISSTUISUEJI we yooyo 100p pue Su oop Jey eny s yejd Jays sayoiey S FUH MOAIOSaI UO YYW pue NIW Uueemjog pm oyeg s3ILI9VdY ANY SNOILV IHIJdS LONGOYd J NVYNALNIVN 313 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 Mark LT mlt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 19ST D x0q 9 9 suoyes 0 0E yue fon y eI17JU 9U0 ey ah ao ToyseA PIOTSPUM CIOP s enb gg pry Joysea Pletyspuly W802 UMTUIIG IeII10J OI pm l i X SLA I JSULIL YLIDIOJOW WEL SHEEP ie pInyj oseo I JsSUeLIL IIOAIOSOI UO SOUTT A eNOODddN ALY O XVI pue NIN pmy Sun Ss I MOd WO GuLX A eNOOUMW Yero 10 0 u M449q 07 MA A NOOUAN ol LV g Te eD Agu PMY WO S LX A eNOOUMW YLeIDIOJON syrenD 6 T UOIssTUIsURI onewomy qUBOTIqN T y oy MPS 0197 sud g g OFT MSL AVS WLIO qUBOTIqN T pete aes y Tey um Id 107 squid 2 PMI PXP XL Juo 06 M08 AVS LI1070 9T LEI66NW SSM soed Yeo T doyg wloysag s d Yea 9 OA SUT OOD JJeIN10 0 dojs w s s SulooD 7 pe10 oo moy a4 IV TSAL6IN SSM quese SUMOJ YIM 1003 juejooo aursuy PPL OK quRTOOD usuy prop send g Ig Unud JJLeIdI
102. Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A amp B will be connected to FES DISC Menu mode Press MENU once on the DVD system to access the DVD disc menu if available Press MENU twice to access the DVD set up menu and the following features 1 ZOOM 2 ANGLE 3 ASPECT RATIO 4 LANGUAGE A ae 5 SUB TITLES I Restore DEFAULTS Angle mode Select ANGLE to select various angles of view for the DVD ASPECT RATIO LANGUAGE SUB TITLES COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS M BACK 55 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems This is disc dependent some DVD discs may have more viewing angles to select from Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is Angle 1 Aspect ratio Select ASPECT RATIO to select the viewing size and shape of the video displayed on the LCD screen This is disc dependent You can select from WIDE LETTER BOX or PAN SCAN Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The LCD screen display will immediately change to your selection after the system resumes play
103. OLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available 292 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Used
104. ON position and any door is open ED Low tire pressure warning Iluminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains ON at start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to ON the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn ON have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter OC Overdrive off lluminates when o D the overdrive function of the transmission has been turned off OFF refer to the Driving chapter If the light flashes steadily or does not illuminate have the transmission serviced soon or damage may occur Traction Control Cif equipped Iluminates when the Traction Control is active If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately refer to the Driving chapter for more information 14 2008 Mark LT mlt Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Four wheel drive low 4x4 Cif equipped Illuminates when four wheel drive low is engaged LOW Four wheel drive high 4x4 HI Cif equipped Illuminates when four wheel drive high is engaged Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is activated Turns off when the speed control system is
105. Roadside Emergencies 2 Connect the other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 260 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Do not use fuel lines engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 261 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illu
106. SAFE MODE Displayed when the engine has defaulted to a limp home operation If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible DATA ERR These messages indicate improper operation of the vehicle network communication between electronic modules e Fuel computer e Charging system e Autolamp delay e Auto locks e Brake fluid e Compass e Outside temperature e Engine sensor Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible if these messages occur on a regular basis POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT Do not install additional floor mats on top of the factory installed floor mats as they may interfere with the accelerator or the brake pedals Position the floor mat so that the A eyelet is over the pointed end of the retention post Make sure that the gt mat does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator or the l brake pedal To remove the floor mat reverse the installation procedure PT 111 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls TAILGATE LOCK Your vehicle may be equipped with a tailgate lock designed to help prevent theft of the tailgate e Insert ignition key and turn to the right to engage lock e Turn ignition key to the left to unlock Tailgate removal Your tailgate is removable to allow more room for loading Note If equipped with a Reverse Camera System RCS do steps 1 through 3 before r
107. Table of Contents Introduction 4 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 16 Entertainment Systems 19 How to get going 19 AM FM stereo with in dash six CD 23 Auxiliary input jack Line in 31 Satellite radio information 35 Family entertainment system 38 Climate Controls 68 Automatic temperature control 68 Rear window defroster 71 Lights 72 Headlamps 72 Turn signal control 75 Bulb replacement Li Driver Controls 82 Windshield wiper washer control 82 Steering wheel adjustment 82 Power windows 88 Mirrors 90 Speed control 94 Message center 102 Tailgate 112 Locks and Security 121 Keys 121 Locks 121 Anti theft system 132 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Table of Contents Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes Traction Control Transmission operation Roadside Emergencies Getting roadside assistance Hazard flasher switch Fuel pump shut off switch Fuses and relays Changing tires Lug nut torque Jump starting Wrecker towing Customer Assistance Reporting safety defects U S only Reporting safety defects Canada only Cleaning 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 135 135 141 156 165 178 180
108. XX To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive N a Time perform the following Nw 0000DD D mi 1 Press and release RESET in order to start the timer 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer Setup menu Press this control for the following displays e System Check e Units English Metric e Autolock e Autolamp Delay e Language System check Selecting this function from the SETUP menu causes the message PRESS RESET center to cycle through each of the EOR SUS CHECK systems being monitored For each of the monitored systems the message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message for three seconds Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of the systems being monitored 106 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the message center is as follows 1 FUEL LEVEL 2 ENGINE TEMP 3 OIL PRESSURE 4 BRAKE FLUID LEVEL 5 CHARGING SYSTEM Units English Metric 1 Select this function from the SETUP menu for the current units UNITS to be displayed lt ENG gt fiETRIC 2 Press the RESET control to change from English to Metric Autolocks This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion 1 To disable
109. Y ROCK etc or the station name WYCD WXYZ etc 25 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems BASS Press MENU to reach the bass setting Use W lt q SEEK SEEK to adjust TREB Treble Press MENU to reach the treble setting Use A W lt SEEK SEEK to adjust BAL Balance Press MENU to reach the balance setting Use A IV 4 SEEK SEEK gt to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers FADE Press MENU to reach the fade setting Use W lt q SEEK SEEK P to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers ALL SEATS Occupancy mode Press MENU repeatedly to access Press W lt SEEK amp to optimize sound for ALL SEATS DRIVERS SEAT or REAR SEATS SPEEDVOL Speed sensitive volume if equipped Press MENU to reach the SPEEDVOL setting Radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Use V lt SEEK SEEK to adjust The default setting is off increasing your vehicle speed will not change the volume level Adjust 1 7 Increasing this setting from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting Track Folder Mode Available only on MP8 discs in CD mode
110. action performance The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them 181 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tir
111. aler for details and a copy of the warranty Following is a list of several Genuine Lincoln Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models To find out what accessories are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www lincolnaccessories com Exterior style Bug shields Chrome exhaust tips Deflectors Running boards Splash guards Step bars Tonneau covers Wheels Interior style Electrochromatic compass temperature interior mirrors Floor mats 319 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Accessories Lifestyle Ash cup smoker s package Bedliners and bedmats Cargo organization and management Towing mirrors Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories Peace of mind Mobile ease hands free communication system Remote start Vehicle security systems Wheel locks For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems
112. already loaded into the system CD play will begin where it ended last 20 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems For a single CD system if a disc is not already loaded insert only one label side up into the CD slot LOADING CD and READING DISC will appear in the display The first track on the disc will begin playing For an in dash six CD system if a disc is not already loaded press LOAD Select a slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within 5 seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to 6 discs press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the last loaded disc will begin to play Note An MP3 disc with folders will show F001 folder T001 track in the display An MP3 disc without folders will show T001 track in the display Refer to MP3 folder structure later in this chapter for further information 3 In CD MP3 mode you can access the following features Press lt Q SEEK SEEK gt to access the previous next tracks seex seek Press and hold REW to manually reverse in a CD MP3 track Press and
113. also turn on the headlamps Autolamp control The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control The autolamp system will allow you to keep the headlamps on for 0 180 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to OFF See Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter e To turn autolamps on rotate the control counterclockwise to e To turn autolamps off rotate the control clockwise to O Fog lamp control The headlamp control also operates the fog lamps The fog lamps can be turned on only when the headlamp control is in the gD amp or PS position and the high beams are not turned on Pull headlamp control towards you to turn fog lamps on The fog lamp indicator light will illuminate 72 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights High beams ZD Push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate Pull the lever towards you to deactivate Flash to pass Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output In order for the DRLs to function e the ignition must be in the ON position and e the headlamp control is in the OFF parking lamp or autolamp position Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Runn
114. an the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations 204 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lb 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ib and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ib 1400 750 5 x 150 650 lb In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate
115. an two seconds to This message should produce audio for the disappear shortly selected channel SAT FAULT Internal module or If this message does system failure not clear within a short present period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service INVALID CHNL Channel no longer This previously available available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button UNSUBSCRIBED Subscription not Contact SIRIUS at available for this 1 888 539 7474 to channel subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel NO TEXT Artist information not Artist information not available available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 37 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required NO TEXT Song title information Song title information not available NO TEXT NO SIGNAL Category information not available Loss of signal from the SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS tower to the vehicle antenna Update of channel programming in progress Satellite service has been deactivated by SIRIUS Satellite Radio UPDATING CALL SIRIUS 1 888 539 7474 not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly Category information not available at thi
116. ance during cold weather operation When ambient temperature is 23 F 5 C or below and the engine coolant temperature is below 100 F 88 C light throttle upshifts may be slightly delayed Once the engine coolant temperature reaches 160 F 71 C the normal shift strategy will resume This is normal operation and will not affect the function or the durability of the transmission If the normal shift strategy does not resume once the engine coolant temperature reaches the normal operating temperature or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function normally see your authorized dealer as soon as possible P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Start the engine e Depress the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear e Release the parking brake 223 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gear
117. ansmission damage 258 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 259 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus
118. apter Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle Normal characteristics On some 4WD models the initial shift from two wheel drive to 4x4 while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution 235 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs Gf possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehi
119. arket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded key but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel e When the ignition is in the 1 OFF LOCK position the indicator will flash once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the 3 ON position the indicator will glow for 3 seconds to indicate normal system functionality 132 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 3 ON position If this occurs the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for service Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately Se after switching the ignition to the 1
120. as set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it 180 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 1 1 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA ABC The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor tr
121. ause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection 293 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications What you should know about fail safe cooling if equipped If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The message center will indicate a system warning refer to Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter e The Service engine soon C indicator light will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperatur
122. authorized dealer 198 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required Warning Light Flashing Warning Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in Light use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes have the system inspected by your authorized dealer When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the
123. authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Unlocking the doors 1 Press OQ and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors Locking the doors amp 1 Press A and release to lock all the doors The parklamps will flash 124 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed and locked Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp once and the parklamps will flash once more If any of the doors are not properly closed the horn will make two quick chirps and the parklamps will not flash Power door lock unlock disable feature The Cock and OQ unlock features on your power door locks will not work from inside the vehicle when e the ignition has been turned to the 1 OFF LOCK position and e 20 seconds elapse after all vehicle doors are closed and locked using the remote entry transmitter the keyless entry pad or the power door lock control while the accompanying door is open The Cock and OQ unlock features will work again after e a door has become ajar e the ignition is turned to the 3 ON position or e using the UNLOCK OQ control on your remote entry transmitter or unlocking via the keyless entry keypad Deactivating activating p
124. aximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 191 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certification Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle
125. back of the DVD The system default is WIDE 16 9 Language Select LANGUAGE to select the language you would like to use for audio output English Spanish French This is disc dependent 56 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus ANGLE 2 ZOOM LANGUAGE SUB TITLES tae T E DVD SETUP SELECT THE DESIRED ASPECT RATIO WIDE 16 9 LETTER BOX PAN SCAN ASPECT RATIO LANGUAGE UB ES Entertainment Systems Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm The system default is English Subtitles Select SUBTITLES to turn the subtitle option on or off The system default is OFF COMPRESSION RESTORE DEFAULTS BACK Once you have made your selection press ENTER to confirm This is disc dependent Audio CDs To play audio CDs on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the DVD system is ON 3 Insert an audio CD into the DVD system label side up 4 The track and elapsed time will CD AUDIO DISC ma 2 00 54 appear in the status bar Use the DVD cursor controls on the bezel to highlight which track you would like to play You can also use the cursor controls to highlight COMPRESSION SHUFFLE or SCAN Once you have highlighted the desired track or function press ENTER on the DVD bezel to confirm your selection 57 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainme
126. ber of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present 34 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder TOO1 track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various PI s1 mp3 files may be present files with mp3 extensions other than mp3 only files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored y mp3 3 by the system This enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety Ame of tasks on your work computer J1 mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system FT 4 mp3 LJ mp3 7 F 2 doc El ppt _xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if e
127. ccepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal e Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button PA Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the l hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 101 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Erasing HomeLink buttons To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot tt be erased e Press and hold the two outer O O HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light wil
128. ceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information Trailer towing tips Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached The trailer tongue weight should be 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather hilly conditions at GCWR or any combination of these factors consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for the lubricant specification Remember that regardless of the rear axle lube used do not tow a trailer for the first 1 000 miles 1600 km of a new vehicle and that the first 500 miles 800 km of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph 112 km h with no full throttle starts After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park automatic transmission or N Neutral
129. cheduled maintenance information Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 Ib 180 kg of weight carried Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski luggage racks may reduce fuel economy To maximize the fuel economy drive with the tonneau cover installed if equipped 302 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Four wheel drive operation Gf equipped is less fuel efficient than two wheel drive operation e Close windows for high speed driving EPA window sticker Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the wi
130. ck for leaks FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components Roadside Emergencies Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 243 Roadside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR sae Cartridge 7 Fuse Mini Standard 18 Fuse link maxi rating fuses fuses cartridge fuses 2A 3A _ Violet ee 4A Pink Pik a isa Bue Blue _ el Green Red Red Ton Brown Natural Passenger compartment fuse panel power distribution box The fuse panel is located under the right hand side of the instrument panel Remove the trim panel and fuse box cover to access the fuses To remove the fuse box cover place a finger behind the PULL tab and your thumb above the PULL tab as shown in the illustration then pull the cover off To reinstall the fuse box cover place the top part of the cover on the fuse panel then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear
131. ck mode all tracks on the current disc will shuffle in random order In MP3 folder mode the system will randomly play all tracks within the current folder 8 FOLDER Press FOLDER P gt to access next folder on MP8 discs if available 9 lt q FOLDER Press lt 4 FOLDER to access the previous folder on MP3 discs if available 10 FF Fast forward Press FF Ea to manually advance in a CD MP3 track 11 REW Rewind Press REW to manually reverse in a CD MP3 track 12 Memory presets To set a station Select frequency band AM FM1 FM2 tune to a station press and hold a preset control until sound returns You may store up to six stations in each frequency band for a total of 18 In satellite radio mode if equipped there are 18 available presets six each for SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 13 TEXT SCAN In radio and ES CD MP3 mode press and hold to hear a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks 28 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems In CD MP3 mode press and release to display track title artist name and disc title and file name if available In satellite radio mode if equipped press and relea
132. cle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does slide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle If the transmission transfer case or front axle are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary Driving through deep water may damage the transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant should be replaced After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly 236 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may ma
133. cle is equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack AIJ located in the instrument panel tray The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal performance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 31 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music
134. cle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity Utility and four wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander 233 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Emergency maneuvers
135. d will remain illuminated until the parking brake is released B RAKE To release pull the lever 2 Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park TRACTION CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Traction Control system This system helps you maintain the stability and steerability of your vehicle especially on slippery road surfaces such as snow or ice covered roads and gravel roads The system will allow your vehicle to make better use of available traction in these conditions 218 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving During Traction Control operation the traction control active light will illuminate and the engine will not rev up when you push further on the accelerator This is normal system behavior and should be no reason for concern Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal injury or property damage The occurrence of a Traction Control event is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this may lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If you experience a severe road event SLOW DOWN The Traction Control switch located on the center console has an indicator light that illuminates when the syst
136. deactivated Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on If the indicators stay on or flash faster check for a burned out bulb D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the OFF LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver s door is opened High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened 15 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If it enters the red section the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible switch off the engine and let the engine cool Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 16 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English Trip odometer Registers the miles kilometers of individual journeys Pre
137. defrost 69 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls 13 OFF Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate 14 Temperature control Press to increase decrease the temperature in the vehicle cabin 15 AUTO To engage automatic temperature control press AUTO and select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 47 position To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the airflow selector in the OFF or with C amp gt recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield e To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been aired out e For maximum cooling performance Max A C In AUTO Press AUTO control and set to desired temperature In Manual Override Control Press the 7s panel A C and ag recirculation controls set the temperature to 60 F 15 C and the fan to the highest blower setting e To aid in
138. der to steer the vehicle Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still maintain steering control Apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes 237 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Driving on snow and ice 4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the Anti lock Brake System ABS Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also putting them on the rear tires This could cause the rear to sl
139. dicator light Press again to deactivate the passenger heated seat 5 Y Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts demister outlets and the front and rear seat floor ducts 6 A Distributes air through the floor and rear seat floor ducts T 7 Distributes air through the windshield defroster ducts demister outlets and the front and rear seat floor ducts 8 po Distributes air through the instrument panel and center console registers 9 c Driver heated seat control Press to heat the driver seat Press once to activate high heat two indicator lights Press again to activate low heat one indicator light Press again to deactivate the driver heated seat 10 Manual override controls Allows you to manually select where airflow is directed To return to full automatic control press AUTO 11 lt Recirculation control Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in cabin Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculation can be engaged manually in any other airflow selection except U7 defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C 12 A C control Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency Engages automatically in AUTO QQ defrost and F floor
140. ditional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System 197 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required Warning Light Solid Warning Light Tire s 1 Check your tire pressure to under inflated ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 32 km h before the light will turn OFF Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON have the system inspected by your
141. dling capability 186 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should consult your Ford dealer Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement see an authorized dealer When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubricate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken
142. dphones will automatically turn off They will also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature If this happens simply turn the headphones on again and continue use 52 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Wired headphones Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves You may purchase wired headphones for your FES Family Entertainment System Plug them into the 3 5 mm headphone jack s located on the left and right sides of the system Channel A is located on the left side and Channel B is located on the right side These headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode To listen to the audio on wired headphones not included connect the wired headphones into the headphone jacks on the sides of the DVD system The wired headphone jack for Channel A is located on the left side of the FES and is labeled A A Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel A source The wired headphone jack for Channel B is located on the right side of the FES and is labeled B Headphones plugged into this headphone jack will hear audio from the audio source selected to be the Channel B source Adjust the headphone volume using t
143. e e The engine will completely shut down e Steering and braking effort will increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low 294 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible FUEL FILTER For fuel filter replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter Replace the fuel filter with an authoriz
144. e recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label 183 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot G e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove the cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air b
145. e The readiness lights will not Uw illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners See your authorized dealer Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate 161 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system will disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat e
146. e bottom part of the rocker switch and release quickly Press the rocker switch again to stop Note The rear window switches will not illuminate when the window control is in the LOCKED position Press the right side to restore the window controls Power Sliding Back Window To operate the power sliding back window the ignition switch must be in the Run or Accessory position 89 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls e Press and hold the bottom part of the rocker switch to open window all the way to the full open position e Press and hold the top part of the rocker switch to close the window When operating the power sliding back window you must ensure all rear seat occupants and or cargo are not in the proximity of the back window Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power sliding back window They may seriously injure themselves Accessory delay With accessory delay the window switches may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until the driver s door is opened INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror UP or DOWN and from SIDE to SIDE fp Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion 90 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls
147. e child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 171 Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out and a click is heard e 6 Allow the belt to retract The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and R pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with your knee on the child seat N 172 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 8 Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt 9 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to mak
148. e eri 269 322 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus D Daytime running lamps see LAMPS ssa saccshesreescesazcctions 73 Dipstick automatic transmission PLUG G EA REE EES 307 Engine Oll x ccdecesssnssiesrsereeestancceee 284 Driveline universal joint and Slip yoke ee 310 Driving under special conditions s s s 225 233 237 SING EEA E A cape es eneautecter sas 235 snow and ice woeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 238 through water s 236 239 DVD Syste arsonianoroaeoe 38 E Electronic message center 102 Emergencies roadside jJump starting 0 eee 258 Emergency Flashers 242 Emission control system 303 ENENGE sinnene a ta iasetees 316 Cleaning serari 275 coolant sasinen ia 289 fail safe cooling c eee 294 idle speed control 287 lubrication specifications 313 refill capacities wee 313 SELVICE POINTS ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 282 starting after a collision 242 Engine block heater o s 215 Engine oil srerrrnensireseneasuns 284 change oil soon warning Message CENTET neresironras 284 checking and adding 284 CID STICK ss2scc5 Hactiansesceencioase 284 filter specifications 286 312 recommendations ccce 286 refill capacities 313 Specifications srira 313 Event data recording 0 7 Exhaust fumes ccccceeeeeees 215 F Fail safe cooling srsssiisisiisss
149. e front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below Pass Airbag Off Small i e 3 ring Unilit Disabled binder small purse bottled water Medium i e heavy Lit Disabled briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled In case there is a problem with the e P front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness lamp in the TN instrument cluster will stay lit DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center seating position An out of position front center occupant could affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance section of this Owner s Guide Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system 164 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to prop
150. e it from the vehicle s memory or you would like to purchase additional remote transmitters and have them programmed to your vehicle e Take all your vehicle s transmitters to your authorized dealer for programming or e Perform the programming procedure yourself Programming remote transmitters It is necessary to have all maximum of six original and or new of your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure If all remote entry transmitters are not present during the programming procedure the transmitters that are not present during programming will no longer operate the vehicle To program the transmitters yourself Note Ensure the brake pedal is not o depressed during this sequence e Unlock all doors using the power door lock unlock control Insert a Q key and turn the ignition from 4 the 1 OFF LOCK to the 3 ON position and cycle between 1 OFF LOCK and 3 ON eight times in rapid succession within 10 seconds with the eighth turn ending in the 3 ON position The locks will cycle to confirm that the programming mode has been entered e Within 20 seconds program a remote transmitter by pressing any button on a transmitter The locks will cycle once to confirm that the remote transmitter has been programmed If more than 20 seconds pass before pressing a remote transmitter button the programming mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated e Repeat the
151. e power steering fluid reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort If the steering wanders or pulls check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneven tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper steering alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull TRACTION LOK AXLE IF EQUIPPED This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface Under normal conditions the Traction Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working PREPARING TO DRIVE Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car 220 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower cente
152. e sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 48 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the
153. e stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion 32 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only ia Never touch the playing surface e Inspect discs before playing e Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out Dont e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion 33 2
154. e sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation 10 Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 2 through 9 Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Attaching child safety seats with tether straps i Most new forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap The passenger seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether anchors in your vehicle may be loops of webbing above the seatback or an anchor bracket behind the seat on the rear edge of the seat cushion The rear seat has three straps along the top of the seatback that function as both routing loops for the tether straps and anchor loops 173 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following posit
155. eaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right Fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components 299 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal Normally adding 1 gallon 8 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The Service engine soon C indicator may come on For more information on the Service engine soon C indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles
156. eans or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur 264 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED At home You must take your Lincoln or Mercury vehicle to an authorized dealer for warranty repairs While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies or procedures please contact the Lincoln Mercury Customer Relationship Center at
157. ectrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners 287 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery Wh
158. ed Motorcraft part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important safety precautions Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap Otherwise fuel may spray out and injure you or others If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision which may result in possible personal injury Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled A Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent 295 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediat
159. ed discs If the discs are not removed the system will reload the discs 22 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Audiophile in dash six CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system 4 m MENU AUX 14 VOL PUSH lt SEEK xt SEEK gt 5 1 3H EW ATOL DER FOL are ai a Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay which allows you to operate the window switches and audio system for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened 1 A v Tune Disc selector In radio mode press to manually go up C or down A the radio frequency Press and hold for a fast advance through radio frequencies In CD MP3 mode press to select the desired disc In menu mode use to select various settings In satellite radio mode press to advance through the satellite radio channels 23 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Satellite radio is available o
160. eep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other engine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean e Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine 5 4L ENGINE e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 e For plastic headlamp lenses use Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 275 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic con
161. ehicle please have the following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and the city where the authorized dealer is located e The year and make of your vehicle e The date of vehicle purchase e The current odometer reading e The vehicle identification number VIN Additional Assistance If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute you may wish to contact the Better Business Bureau BBB AUTO LINE program U S only 266 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance In some states in the U S you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
162. ehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase 179 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces particularly in off road use As a result of the above dimensional differences SUV s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called Tire Quality Grades The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation h
163. el Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity Chow much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 201 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs 7 MANUAL FOR 200 KPA 29 Ps ADDITIONAL SPARE 7145 80D16 420 KPA 60PSI INFORMATION P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY FRONT XX REAR x NOMBRE DE PLACES AVANT ARRI RE The combined
164. ely apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses Gif worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhali
165. ely affect your vehicle s handling and braking and may lead to loss of vehicle control Do not use snow chains or cables on this vehicle as they may cause damage to your vehicle which may lead to loss of vehicle control VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 200 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Lab
166. em is off The Traction Control system will automatically turn on every time the ignition is turned off and on The Traction Control system should normally be left on If you should become stuck in snow or ice or on a very slippery road surface try switching the Traction Control system off This may allow excess wheel spin to dig the vehicle out and enable a successful rocking maneuver Remember to switch the Traction Control system back on once the vehicle is no longer stuck If a system fault is detected the traction control active light will illuminate the Traction Control button will not turn the system on or off and your vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer STEERING To help prevent damage to the power steering system e Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir 219 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e Some noise is normal during operation If the noise is excessive check for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by a low power steering fluid level Check for a low power steering fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer Do not fill th
167. em while the vehicle is in motion Give full attention to driving and to the road Pull off the road in a safe place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system A remote control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the FES functions without distracting the driver Quick start Your Family Entertainment System includes a DVD system two sets of wireless infrared IR headphones and a wireless infrared IR remote control To play a DVD in the DVD system The DVD system can play DVD Video DVD R DVD R W discs as well as audio CDs and video CDs To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints scratches and cleanliness Clean with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Insert a DVD into the system label side up to turn on the system D It will load automatically 3 Press the power button on the DVD player then press Play HL to begin to play the disc If a DVD is already loaded into the system press PLAY on the DVD player Note If sound can be heard but no video is present press VIDEO to select the video source DVD or aux inputs 39 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Press VIDEO to change the source displayed on the screen Press repeatedly to cycle through DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD OFF Press the power button to turn the
168. emory preset and the station frequency will appear on the display 19 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Listening to satellite radio if equipped 1 If the audio system is turned off VOL PUSH press VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press AUX repeatedly to cycle through auxiliary audio sources ax Select SAT1 SAT2 or SATS to listen to satellite radio 3 Press lt Q SEEK SEEK to access the previous or next satellite Gseex 7 seexe channel You may also seek by music category For further information refer to CATEGORY listing under the MENU control on your specific audio system 4 Once you are tuned to the desired channel press and hold a memory preset 1 6 to save the channel PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will return signifying the station has been saved You can save up to six channels in each six in SAT1 six in SAT2 and six in SATS To access your saved channels press the corresponding memory preset The memory preset and the channel name will appear on the display Listening to a CD MP3 if equipped 1 If the audio system is turned off VOL PUSH press VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press CD to enter CD mode If a disc is
169. emoving the tailgate 1 Before removal of the tailgate locate and disconnect the tailgate in line connector under the pickup box on the right hand side of the vehicle near the spare tire 2 Install a protective cap located in the glove box onto the vehicle in line RCS connector 3 Partially lower tailgate and carefully feed tailgate harness up through the truck box and the bumper Secure the tailgate harness onto the vehicle box 4 Lower the tailgate 5 Use a screwdriver to pry the spring clip on each connector past the head of the support screw Disconnect cable 6 Disconnect the other cable 7 Lift tailgate to a 45 degree angle from horizontal 8 Lift right side off of its hinge 9 Lift tailgate to a 80 degree angle from horizontal 112 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls 10 Remove tailgate from left side hinge by sliding tailgate to the right To install follow the removal procedures in reverse order BEDRAILS IF EQUIPPED e This bedrail is for appearance use only y To help prevent injury do not use bedrail to retain cargo e Retain cargo with the pickup tiedown hooks BED EXTENDER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend the pickup box for larger loads To extend the bed extender 1 Lower tailgate 2 Pull the lever on each side of the bed extender to release it from the pickup box 3 L
170. en the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected 288 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized Y A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out
171. enable the autolock _ feature select this function from the AUTO LOCKS SETUP control for the current lt ON gt OFF display mode 2 Press the RESET control to turn the autolocks ON or OFF Autolamp delay This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off 1 To disable enable the autolamp delay feature select this function AUTOLARP from the SETUP control for the BELAY XXX GEL current display mode 2 Press the RESET control to select the new Autolamp delay values of gt 0 gt 10 gt 20 gt 30 gt 60 gt 90 gt 120 or gt 180 107 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Language 1 Select this function from the gt SETUP menu for the current ENGLISH language to be displayed PECET FOR NEL Nc 2 Pressing the RESET control a cycles the message center through FOR ENGLISH each of the language choices HOLD RESET t J 3 Press and hold the RESET sa control to set the language choice SET TO ENGLISH NS J System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4 seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages This allows you to use t
172. ence point After proper adjustment the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 2 Note Adjusting a weight distributing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you 208 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase Note Trailer brakes are required for trailers over 2 000 Ibs 907 kg The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn s
173. engine OFF 3 Block the diagonally opposite wheel 4 Obtain the spare tire and jack from their storage locations 5 Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim 254 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 6 Loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 7 Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground When one of the rear wheels is off the ground the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack even if the transmission is in P Park To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change the tire be sure that the parking brake is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked If the vehicle slips off the jack someone could be seriously injured CAL a l LT Teer a RO d ie A7 e Front Note Use the frame rail as the jacking location point NOT the control arm 255 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies e Rear To lessen the risk of personal injury do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack The jack is only meant for changing the tire e Never use the front or rear diffe
174. ensors e the same indicator light RCM restraints control module and diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off indicator light The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal Safety System They are designed to be deployed in cases where the Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices Refer to the Personal Safety System section in this chapter Important SRS precautions All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided 157 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat if your vehicle has a back seat Rear facing infant seats should NEVER be placed in the front seats This is because the back of the infant seat is too close to the inflating airbag and the risk of a fatal injury to the infant when the airbag inflates is substantial The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag cover Never place your arms or feet over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious fractures or other injuries To properly position
175. ent contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca 241 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL A The hazard flasher is located on the steering column just behind the steering wheel The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Push in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SWITCH This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt After an accident if the engine cranks but does not start this switch may have been activated 242 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus This switch is located in the front passenger s footwell behind the kick panel access cover to the left of the fuse box The access cover needs to be removed to reset the fuel pump shut off switch To reset the switch 1 Turn the ignition OFF 2 Check the fuel system for leaks 3 If no leaks are apparent reset the switch by pushing in on the reset button 4 Turn the ignition ON 5 Wait a few seconds and return the key to OFF 6 Make another che
176. er to have the new spare key s programmed 134 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING Notes Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjustable head restraints Head restraints help to limit head motion in the event of a rear collision Adjust your head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head The head restraints can be moved up and down A 135 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Push control to lower head restraint Using the manual recline function Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving To maximize restraint system effectiveness the driver and passenger seat must be in the upright position and the lap belt must be snug and low across the hips while the vehicle is moving To adjust the
177. er fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle yy from the wiper arm Push the lock pin manually to release the blade gt and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance 283 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element ENGINE OIL 927 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Tur
178. ering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced 217 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake B RAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately by an authorized dealer Parking brake To set the parking brake 1 press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate an
179. erly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U S and Canada If small children generally children who are four years old or younger and who weigh 40 Ib 18 kg or less ride in your vehicle you must put them in safety seats made especially for children Many states require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight years old Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle When possible always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use Children and safety belts If the child is the proper size restrain the child in a safety seat Children who are too large for child safety seats as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always wear safety belts Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautio
180. ess and hold SEEK to select the next strong station within the selected radio band In Satellite Radio mode if equipped VOL TEMP i e Press and release SEEK to advance through preset channels or press and hold SEEK to increment to the next subscribed channel In CD mode e Press and release SEEK to select the next track selection on the CD or press and hold SEEK to fast forward in the current track selection In any mode e Press VOL or to adjust volume J SEEK FAN m oO On Climate control features Press TEMP or to adjust temperature Egee l J SEEK o ca 97 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Press FAN or to adjust fan speed VOL p J SEEK OO TEMP 0 MOON ROOF IF EQUIPPED The moon roof control is located on the overhead console Do not let children play with the moon roof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves When closing the moon roof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the moon roof opening Note The moon roof will open to the comfort position first before opening all the way The comfort position helps to alleviate rumbling wind noise which may happen in the vehicle with the roof fully opened To open the moon roof The moon roof is equipped with a
181. eting Ford specification WSS M97B51 A1 Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets or an equivalent product meeting Ford specification WSS M99B37 B6 may darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from yellow to golden tan e Do not add mix an orange colored extended life coolant such as Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification WSS M97B44 D or DEX COOL brand with the factory filled coolant Mixing Motorcraft Specialty Orange Engine Coolant or any orange colored extended life product such as DEX COOL brand with your factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Water alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflo
182. everse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the reverse camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning Servicing e If the vehicle is in R Reverse and the screen in the rear view mirror appears blue for three seconds and turns blank afterwards the camera is not working properly have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer If the vehicle is in R Reverse and the screen is blank and no blue screen is observed the mirror is not working properly have the system inspected by your authorized dealer If the image is not clear then check if there is anything covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized dealer FOUR WHEEL DRIVE 4WD OPERATION IF EQUIPPED For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter Four wheel drive 4WD supplies power to all four wheels 4WD should not be operated on dry pavement driveline damage may occur If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System and 4WD Low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph 5 km h the 4WD system will not engage past 4WD High This is normal and
183. ey are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they weigh about 80 Ib 86 kg about 8 to 12 years old Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat without slouching Does the lap belt rest low across the hips Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip 166 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Types of booster seats There are two types of belt positioning booster seats e Those that are backless gt If your backless booster seat has a removable shield remove the shield and use the lap shoulder belt If a seating position has a low seat back and no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head top of ear level above the top of the a ae seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back and lap shoulder belts Those with a high back If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Either type can be used at any seating position equipped with lap shoulder belts if your child is over 40 Ib
184. f ATSXXX KPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK TINTTR TP PS R TAXLE SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XX XXXX XXXXXXX XX Four speed automatic 4R75E hh Q O 318 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Accessories GENUINE LINCOLN ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Lincoln Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Lincoln or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Lincoln s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Lincoln Accessories found to be defective in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your de
185. filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in scheduled maintenance information Ford production and aftermarket Motorcraft oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application 286 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note El
186. fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints AN To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in map pocket if equipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check Passenger Airbag Disable Indicator for proper Airbag Status Refer to Front Passenger Sensing System chapter for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion Press the front or rear portion to tilt the seat Press the control to move the seat forward backward up or down Memory seats mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped This system allows automatic positioning of the driver seat adjustable pedals if equipped and outside rearview mirrors to two programmable positions The memory seat control is located on the driver s seat e To program position one move the driver seat mirrors and adjustable pedals to the desired position Press the SET control The SET control indicator light will briefly illuminate While the light is illuminated press control 1 138 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e To program position two repeat the previous procedure using control 2 A posit
187. ft cloth e To help maintain its resiliency and color use the Motorcraft Deluxe Leather Care Kit ZC 11 D available from your authorized dealer e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Car Wash Canada only CXC 21 Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish
188. g 4x4 151 wheelbase Rear axle ratio Maximum Maximum GCWR Ib kg trailer weight lb kg 14500 6577 8 600 3901 207 2008 Mark LT mlt Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Trailer frontal area considerations e Not to exceed towing vehicle frontal area without Class IV trailer towing package e Not to exceed 60 square feet 5 52 square meters with Class IV trailer towing package Note Do not exceed trailer weight of 5 000 lb 2268 kg when towing with bumper only Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle See your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle s bumper or attach to the axle You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Weight distributing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and all tae closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 4 13 mm of the refer
189. g media for the headphones 7 VOL Volume When in Single Play press to increase or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones 47 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 8 Fast Forward Next In DVD mode press and hold for a quick advance within the DVD Press and release to advance to the next chapter In CD MP3 mode press to access the next track 9 Play Pause Press to play or pause a DVD 10 SHUFFLE Press to play all tracks on the current CD MP3 disc in random order 11 STOP Press to stop the current DVD or CD MP3 12 q iM Speaker Headphone Single Dual Play Press to toggle between Single Play same media playing through all speakers and Dual Play headphone mode the rear speakers are muted You can also press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function 13 Keypad Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD MP3 track or DVD chapter to be played 14 C Cancel Press to cancel clear the numeric input i e chapter number 15 MEDIA Press to cycle through the possible media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD LINE IN Gf equipped DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources 16 VIDEO Pre
190. g the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 18 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS Quick start How to get going AN Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Listening to the radio 1 If the audio system is off press VOL PUSH VOL PUSH to turn the radio on Turn VOL PUSH to adjust the volume Note The system may take a few moments to turn on 2 Press AM FM repeatedly to choose between AM FM1 FM2 frequency bands 3 Press A IV to manually go up down the frequency band K T Press lt A SEEK p to search down up the chosen frequency band 5 7 for the next strongest station Ed To disengage SEEK mode press A IV 4 Once you are tuned to the desired station press and hold a EAE EE memory preset 1 6 to save the station PRESET SAVED will appear on the display and the sound will return signifying the station has been saved You can save up to six stations in each frequency band six in AM six in FM1 and six in FM2 To access your saved stations press the corresponding memory preset The m
191. ge 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls Please read the section Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction Event Data Recording Other modules in your veh
192. ge A Lock Unlock Compartment Release Panic Alarm s Engine Oil Engine Coolant Breme Coolant Temperature x Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Explosive Gas A Fan Warning Battery Acid Maintain Correct Fluid Power Steering Fluid Level TH 85 D gt LI ir Ge B Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter O Passenger Compartment 3 gt So Air Filter one Check Fuel Cap pS Low Tire Pressure e Warning 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 11 Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES MPH kmh 120 J LINCOLN Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Service engine soon The Service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the Service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the Serv
193. ger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat 162 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag
194. he 3 ON position or from the 3 ON position to the 1 OFF LOCK position 131 2008 Mark LT mlt Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry keypad To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each other Note The driver s door will unlock and the interior lamps will illuminate after the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code are correctly entered To unlock all doors press the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time You do not need to enter the keypad code first Note The interior lamps will turn off SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded keys additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford afterm
195. he code is entered the locks will cycle confirming that the new code has been set Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code e If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Press and release 1 2 then 3 Press and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 1 Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature The keyless entry keypad is equipped with an anti theft function called antiscan The antiscan feature provides a one minute lockout feature where the user is unable to enter the vehicle using the keypad this lockout occurs when a valid entry code has not been entered by the user within 7 attempts 85 consecutive button presses During the lockout the keypad will flash and pressing the controls on the keypad will be ignored except for pressing the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 controls simultaneously which will still lock the vehicle The anti scan feature will be turned off after e one minute when the anti scan feature times out e one minute of keypad inactivity e the control is pressed on the remote entry transmitter e the ignition is turned from the 1 OFF LOCK position to t
196. he full functionality of the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the RESET control and clearing the warning message Warning messages that have been reset are divided into two categories e They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset e They will not reappear until an ignition OFF ON cycle has been completed This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within the vehicle 108 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Warning returns after 10 minutes Warning returns after the ignition key is turned from OFF to ON DOOR AJAR Displayed when a door is not completely closed TRANSMISSION MALFUNCTION Displayed when the transmission is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible CHECK ENGINE TEMPERATURE Displayed when the engine coolant is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine and let it cool Check the coolant and coolant level Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot REDUCED ENGINE POWER Displayed when the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine If the wa
197. he safety belt pretensioners and or either none one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags and pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of
198. he same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added Gin gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits e Smooth moderate operation can yield up t
199. he spare tire carrier ratchets or slips when the tire is raised to the maximum tightness Tighten to the best of your ability to the point where the ratchet slip occurs if possible The spare tire carrier will not allow you to overtighten If the spare tire carrier ratchets or slips with little effort take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience 4 Check that the tire lies flat against the frame and is properly tightened Try to push or pull then turn the tire to be sure it will not move Loosen and retighten if necessary Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the tire 5 Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure every six months as per your scheduled maintenance information or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components 6 If removed install the spare tire lock if equipped into the bumper drive tube with the spare tire lock key Gf equipped and jack handle WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance rotation flat tire wheel removal etc Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque M14 x 2 0 Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners 257 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt
200. he vehicle to a complete stop 2 Place the transmission in N Neutral 231 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving 3 Move the 4WD control to the desired position e If shifting into 4L 4WD Low wait for the 4X4 LOW light in the instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete e If shifting out of 4L 4WD Low wait for the 4X4 LOW light in the instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete Note Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages this is normal Driving off road with truck and utility vehicles 4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the road How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car Maintain steering wheel control at all times especially in rough terrain Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside Do not grip the spokes Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rock
201. he volume control on the DVD system VOLUME Operation Single play Dual play Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones and wired headphones not included to allow the rear seat passengers to listen to the radio and other media sources over the headphones This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways Single Play Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers When the DVD system is on and the same source is playing through the front and rear speakers SINGLE PLAY will appear in the front radio display 53 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Dual Play Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers With the DVD and Rear Seat Controls turned ON the rear seat passengers may choose to listen to the radio CD MP3 DVD or DVD AUX media sources over headphones while the front speakers play the chosen selection for the front audio system they may listen to another over the headphones DUAL PLAY will appear in the radio display When both the front seat passengers and the rear seat passengers listen to the same audio source SHARED MODE will appear on the radio Note If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio the rear seat passengers can also
202. high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 307 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient temperature Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick and the ambient temperature is COLD FoMoCo 5L 3P 7A020 CB above 50 F 10 C Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C on a level surface The
203. hildproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock e Move control down to disengage childproof locks 123 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to unlock the vehicle doors without a key lock all the vehicle doors without a key activate the personal alarm If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your
204. hirp should be heard indicating the system has been disabled Conversely a horn chirp followed by a honk will indicate the system is enabled Pressing the control then the control will turn the feature ON if it was previously OFF or OFF if it was previously ON The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short chirp and one long honk if autolock was activated 122 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 5 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position to exit programming Note After exiting the driver configuration mode the horn will chirp once to indicate a feature has been activated deactivated Keyless entry key pad procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter 5 digit entry code 4 Press and hold the 7 e 8 While holding the 7 e 8 press the 3 e 4 5 Release the 3 e 4 6 Release the 7 e 8 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Message center procedure For information regarding the activation and deactivation of the autolocks feature refer to Message center SETUP button in the Driver Controls chapter CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS e When these locks are set the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside e The rear doors can be opened from the outside when the doors are unlocked The c
205. hlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Lincoln Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e In Mexico www ford com mx e In Australia www ford com au Additional owner information is given in separate publications This Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on the Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle Fuel pump shut off switch In the event of an accident the safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration e g collision when parking To reset the switch refer to the Fuel pump shut off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction SAFETY AND ENV
206. hroughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and han
207. ice engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance Q M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer 12 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning P light is functional it will momentarily illuminate when the B RAKE ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running or in a position between ON and START or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low bra
208. icense nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com Safety information Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the system and retain for future reference 64 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Family Entertainment System FES See your dealer Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves
209. icle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal how fast the vehicle was traveling and e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles Before you drive your vehicle please read this Owner s Guide carefully Your vehicle is not a passenger car As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control vehicle
210. ide and swing around during braking Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder racks or pickup box cover Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off road usage 238 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom A A of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks
211. ields are generated Temperature extremes When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold place for a long period of time wait until the cabin temperature of the vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system Humidity and moisture condensation Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and or player If moisture condensation occurs do not insert a CD or DVD into the player If one is already in the player remove it Turn the DVD player ON to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD This could take an hour or more 66 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Foreign substances Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD player compartment Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind onto the media controls or into the system If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service technician Cleaning the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any ammonia based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth Rub the screen gently until the dust dirt or fingerprints are removed Do not spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning s
212. ift the bed extender over onto the tailgate 4 Evenly push down on the bed extender and push the lever in on each side locking it in place To stow the bed extender follow steps one through four in reverse order The bed extender may be used to secure a load of up to 100 lb 46 kg on the tailgate The bed extender should always be kept in the stowed position with the tailgate closed when not in use 113 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Activating bed extender Theft N Deterrent Device yN 4 The following procedure can be N done with the bed extender in the gt stowed or extended position 1 Locate the Phillips head screw in F f the middle of the vertical brace in front of the locking clip 2 Turn the screw counterclockwise until you hear an audible click 3 To deactivate turn the screw clockwise until the locking clip moves freely To remove the bed extender 1 Extend the bed extender 2 Pull the lever on each side of the bed extender to unlock it Make sure the locking clip screws are loose before removing the bed extender 3 Press the locking clips below the middle bar and lift the bed extender out of the channels on the D pillar To install the bed extender follow the removal procedure in reverse order CARGO AREA FEATURES IF EQUIPPED Cargo management system if equipped
213. ignals and hazard lights are working See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Using a step bumper if equipped The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a ball with a one inch 25 4 mm shank diameter The bumper has a 5 000 lb 2 270 kg trailer weight and 500 Ib 227 kg tongue weight capacity If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position a frame mounted trailer hitch must be installed Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components do not trailer tow during the first 1 000 miles 1600 km of a new vehicle e To ensure proper break in of powertrain components during the first 500 miles 800 km of trailer towing drive no faster than 70 mph 112 km h with no full throttle starts Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer 209 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading To eliminate excessive shifting use a lower gear This will also assist in transmission cooling For additional information refer to Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4 speed automatic transmission in the Driving chapter Anticipate stops and brake gradually Do not ex
214. ility 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment if applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible 252 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location of the spare tire and tools The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations Spare tire Under the vehicle just forward of the rear bumper Jack jack handle and lug nut Under the rear seat on the wrench passenger side The wing nut must be removed and the jack screw turned counterclockwise to
215. in normal operation and some objects might not be seen The camera lens for the reverse camera system is located on the tailgate near the tailgate handle Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner Note If the reverse camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the reverse camera system The reverse camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the rear view mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the reverse camera system Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle fp Do not use the reverse camera system with the tailgate open 229 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with your authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation Nighttime and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the reverse camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both r
216. ing 0 00 219 fluid checking and adding 806 fluid refill capacity 1 0 0 0 313 fluid specifications 313 Power Windows ccceeeeeeeees 88 Preparing to drive your VENICE oo ccceeeeseeeceeeeesenseees 220 R Radio lt iiciisisdeatisaecicadcacntiiicts 19 28 Rear seat entertainment SVSUGMY scideiisasdeacdee seas ARENES 38 Rear video Camera 00cc0 228 Relays sesisisssreissdsiecavsasstivesieheeseise 243 Remote entry system 124 illuminated entry cc08 129 locking unlocking COOTS icecsiicszessietecetei naar 124 125 panic Alai enirere 126 replacement additional transmitters eiseres 128 replacing the batteries 127 Reverse sensing system 226 Roadside assistance 00 240 S Safety Belt Maintenance 156 2008 Mark LT mlt Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Index Safety belts see Safety restraints 141 144 146 148 150 Safety defects reporting 271 272 Safety restraints 141 144 146 148 150 Belt Minder ieee 151 Belt Minder deactivating activating 154 extension assembly 155 for adults 146 148 for Children x66 sscsiccacesdesdvsavsnce 165 Occupant Classification DESOT sprinters EnaA RENER 142 safety belt maintenance 156 warning light and CHIME goreneraino 150 151 Safety seats for children 169 Safety Compliance Certification Label 0
217. ing Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision 73 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable fini switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parking lamp operation Move the control to the full upright position past detent to turn on the interior lamps Move the control to the full down position past detent to prevent the interior lights from illuminating when the doors are opened Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full Dome ON position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer Vertical aim adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to gr
218. ing lights 73 flash tO pass seiisirsssscicricrissest 73 Mgh DEAN sdexccassnacspenesascascceaseeass 73 replacing bulbs ee 78 turning on and off 0 72 Heating heating and air conditioning SYSUGIN g scisecdaviscssddantseserecassaecteels 68 Homelink wireless control SVSUCIM divccsssdevaveiidssacerssseetscdetadiaeent 99 HOO ss sitesssssdensiihaaivasesneiadianeasatss 281 How to get going 0 ee 19 I ISnio esenta 212 316 Illuminated visor mirror 83 Infant seats see Safety seats oo 169 Inspection maintenance I M GESUING s csescesiscasscasioncincaenccsesneaves 305 323 Index cleaning 15 32 cscs sodas REEE 276 CISTET vorrin anann anan 12 lighting up panel and INGETIOL drakes enanada 74 J JACK E EEE E tether tee 250 POSITIONING weisecsccsiernesrsisrecveessans 250 SUOYASE sas sess sans evccscediveweatods 250 253 Jump starting your vehicle 258 K Keyless entry system 0 130 AUILOLOCK orrae erae a 121 IKCYDAC serrissreinerono a 130 locking and unlocking doors 132 programming entry code 130 KEYS vorar ENE 121 133 positions of the ignition 212 L Lamps autolamp system 00000 72 bulb replacement specifications chart 77 daytime running light 0 73 fog lamps srneci 72 headlamps ccccccccccceseeeeeseees 72 headlamps flash to pass 73 instrument panel dimming
219. ing lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 ON without turning the key to 4 START If there is difficulty in turning the key rotate the steering wheel until the key turns freely 2 Turn the key to 4 START then release the key as soon as the engine starts Note If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try turn the key to OFF wait 10 seconds and try again If the engine still fails to start press and hold the accelerator to the floor and try again this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel 214 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving This vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system which assists in starting the engine If the ignition key is turned to 4 START and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine may continue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long peri
220. ing retractor feature for child seats is still functioning properly In addition all safety belts should be checked for proper function BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked by an authorized dealer Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt buckle pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions Do NOT place objects between the seats as this could interfere with the functioning of the pretensioner 148 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate only during certain frontal or near frontal collisions with sufficient longitudinal deceleration A safety belt buckle pretensioner is a device which tightens the webbing of the lap and shoulder belts during some collisions in such a way that they fit more snugly against the body The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in the activation of the safety belt pretensioners Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in
221. inner or any other solvent 65 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Federal Communication Commission FCC Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference and radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Care and service of the DVD player Environmental extremes DVD players which are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability To avoid these outcomes whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to e extremely hot or cold temperatures direct sunlight high humidity a dusty environment locations where strong magnetic f
222. ion be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS 0O i 1 Airbag cover 156 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries The term supplemental restraint means the airbags are intended as a supplement to the safety belts Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy and airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not deploy The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of e driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules which include the inflators and airbags e one or more impact and safing s
223. ion can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park A memory position may be programmed at any time Heated seats if equipped Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats do the following e Push control located on the o o instrument panel to set at high ra heat Lz e Push control again to set at low heat e Push again to deactivate The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated The system automatically shuts off after 10 minutes REAR SEATS Head restraints The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear
224. ions shown from top view E p g Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases Rear seat tether strap attachment There are three loops of webbing just above the back of the rear seat along the bottom edge of the rear window These loops are to be used as both routing loops and anchor loops for up to three child safety seat tether straps For example the center loop can be used as a routing loop for a child safety seat in the center rear seat and as an anchoring loop for child seats installed in the outboard rear seats 174 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Many tether straps cannot be tightened if the tether strap is hooked to the loop directly behind the child seat To provide a tight tether strap 1 Route the tether strap under the head restraint and through the loop directly behind the child seat 2 Route the tether strap behind the head restraint supports to a loop behind an adjacent seating position and hook the strap hook onto the loop If using the driver s side pass the strap behind the shoulder belt mounting for the center seat e Always put the tether strap through the routing loo
225. is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer or king pin weight of 15 25 fifth wheel trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch Examples For a 5 000 lb 2 268 kg conventional trailer multiply 5 000 by 0 10 and 0 15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb 227 to 340 kg For an 11 500 lb 5 216 kg fifth wheel trailer multiply by 0 15 and 0 25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1 725 to 2 875 Ib 782 to 1 304 kg Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit th
226. istance THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer Experience has shown that our customers have been very successful in achieving satisfaction by following the three step procedure outlined on the front page of the Warranty Guide However if your warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step procedure you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration Initially the BBB will try to resolve your question or concern through mediation Mediation is a process through which a representative of the BBB will contact the parties and explore options for settlement of your claim If mediation is not successful customers with eligible claims may participate in the BBB AUTO LINE arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but may choose to accept it If you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision then Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well If the arbitrator has decided in your favor and you accept the decision the BBB AUTO LINE program will contact you to ensure that Ford has complied with the decision in a timely manner
227. istance and deductible combinations which can be tailored to fit your own driving needs Ford ESP also offers reimbursement benefits for towing and rental coverage When you buy Ford ESP you receive Peace of Mind protection throughout the United States and Canada provided by a network of more than 4 600 participating authorized dealers 269 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the time of purchasing your vehicle you may still be eligible Since this information is subject to change please ask your authorized dealer for complete details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options or visit the Ford ESP website at www ford esp com GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for a
228. ite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability Setting the clock Press until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINUTES is displayed Press A IV 4 SEEK p gt to adjust the hours minutes AUTOSET Press MENU until the display reads AUTOSET Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 Use A IV lt q SEEK SEEK p to turn on off When the six strongest stations are filled the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are less than six strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RBDS Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RBDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY INFORM JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate press MENU repeatedly until RBDS ON OFF appears in the display Use W lt SEEK SEEK to toggle RBDS ON OFF When RBDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RBDS equipped stations or view the station name or type To search for specific RBDS music categories Press MENU repeatedly until a music category appears in the display Press A IV to find the desired type Then press SEEK SEEK gt or SCAN to begin the search To view the station name or type When the desired category appears in the display press TEXT SCAN to toggle between displaying the station type COUNTR
229. k Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the airbag when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of the airbag s after a collision When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has turned off the passenger s frontal airbag the pass airbag off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is off See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section of this chapter Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage Refer to Safety belt usage sensors later in this chapter Front outboard safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant
230. ke fluid level and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury Anti lock brake system If the ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated Airbag readiness If this light fails OQ to iluminate when the ignition is A turned to ON continues to flash or PV remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected 13 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Instrument Cluster Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Charging system luminates when the battery is not charging properly Door ajar Illuminates when the ignition is in the
231. ke it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the crest of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control When you brake hard the front wheels can t turn and if they aren t turning you won t be able to steer The front wheels have to be turning in or
232. kly on the belt Automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt When to use the automatic locking mode e Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front outboard and rear seating positions Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this chapter How to use the automatic locking mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 147 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode After any vehicle collision the safety belt systems at all outboard seating positions except the driver position which does not have this feature must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the automatic lock
233. l begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 MESSAGE CENTER With the ignition in the ON position the message center located on your instrument cluster displays important vehicle een NW 888868 mi through a constant monitor of vehicle systems You may select display features on the message center for a display of status preceded by a brief indicator chime The system will also notify you of potential vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long indicator chime If equipped with an outside temperature display it will display in the instrument cluster all the time except when a warning message is present 102 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Selectable features Reset Press this control to select and reset functions shown in the INFO menu and SETUP menu Info menu This control displays the following control displays e Odometer Compass e Trip odometer Odometer Compass e Distance to Empty e Average Fuel Economy e Trip Elapsed Drive Time Odometer Trip odometer Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter Compass display The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic
234. l is working properly POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the A vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P Park position y Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal C e Press the bottom of the control to adjust the pedals toward you e Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals away from you The adjustment allows for approximately 3 inches 76 mm of maximum travel 93 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving SPEED CONTROL With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Setting speed control The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience 1 Press the ON control and release it 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press the SET control and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator O light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note E o fu a RESUME On CST SET OFF ON al Gl RESUME Do C2 o a 4 e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill
235. l low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 195 2008 Mark LT mlt Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed The pressure senso
236. ldren must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of injury in a collision Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus os 159 Seating and Safety Restraints How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be presen
237. les of home Belts are uncomfortable We design our safety belts to enhance comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t work Safety belts when used properly reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my clothes Possibly but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with don t Set the example teen deaths occur 4 wear belts times more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see 153 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Reasons given Consider T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown clear Not a good idea People who are ejected are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH
238. les or false alarms REVERSE CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The reverse camera system located on the tailgate provides a video image which appears in the rear view mirror of the area behind the vehicle It adds assistance to the driver while reversing or reverse parking the vehicle UID Hill To use the reverse camera system place the transmission in R a l Reverse an image will display on the left portion of the rear view 20 mirror The area displayed on the 4 screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and or road NS condition e 1 Centerline of vehicle e 2 Rear bumper 228 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e 3 Red zone e 4 Yellow zone e 5 Green zone Always use caution while backing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones Use the side mirrors and rear view mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle When shifting out of reverse and into any other gear the image will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or trailer hookup When towing the reverse camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle this might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides
239. m the following procedure 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition to LOCK then remove the key 221 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving 2 Open the center console bin Using a screwdriver carefully pry off the console finish panel surrounding the shifter mechanism by inserting a screwdriver into the latch slot as shown 3 Remove console finish panel assembly to expose the inside of the gearshift 4 Press and hold the white button located along side the shifter housing assembly as shown in the illustration Press the gearshift lever release on the shifter knob and move the gearshift lever back to N Neutral two places rearward from P Park 5 Start the vehicle and release the parking brake Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 222 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4 speed automatic transmission Your vehicle s automatic transmission is equipped with a special shift strategy that ensures maximum heater perform
240. manual transmissions Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels 210 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Launching or retrieving a boat Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval e do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper e do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches 15 cm above the bottom edge of the rear bumper Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components e causing internal damage to the components e affecting driveability emissions and reliability Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required RECREATIONAL TOWING Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as vehicle or transaxle damage may occur It is recommended to tow your vehicle using a car hauling trailer 211 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 OFF LOCK locks the steering wheel automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key rem
241. ments through the filler tube until the level is correct If an overfill occurs excess fluid 4 should be removed by an authorized dealer COLD FoMoGo 5L3P 7A020 CB An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these materials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components TRANSFER CASE FLUID IF EQUIPPED 1 Clean the filler plug 2 Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level oo _ IA 309 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 3 Add only enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for maintenance intervals If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings lubrication will also be necessary AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the ai
242. n cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a period of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order
243. n increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the Service engine soon C indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the Service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the ON position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the Service engine soon C4 indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the Service engine soon indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing 305
244. n start a fire Illumination of the Service engine soon Cc indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diagnostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standard
245. n the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick weeereeeearet lt lt CRRRSREREE 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again 284 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications e If the oil level is within this range the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL me If the oil level is below this mark engine oil must be added to raise the level within the normal operating range If required add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine oil in this chapter e Do not overfill the engine with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine damage If the engine is overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine owl in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level i
246. nd Dual Play In Single Play mode all speakers listen to the same media In Dual Play mode rear seat passengers can use the infrared wireless or wired not included headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers 63 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems General information Note DVDs are formatted by regions US and Canada systems can only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico systems can only play region 4 DVDs Systems sold in vehicles targeted for other parts of the world would have different regions If a playback problem is encountered please ensure that you are using a disc designed for your vehicle The region coding can be found stamped on the disc or on the box and can say region 1 or region 4 etc They may also be marked by a numerical symbol Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a l
247. ndow sticker These numbers represent the Range of MPG L 100 km expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system 303 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which ca
248. nes Refer to Using the infrared wireless headphones and Using wired headphones for further information e Black 4 wired headphone output wired headphones not included 2 Press the headphone speaker button on the DVD player or press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time A green light will illuminate next to either the A or B Headphone Control Button to indicate which channel is active able to be controlled 3 Press MEDIA to change the audio source of the active channel A or B The audio source will be shown on the display You may change the active channel by pressing the A or B headphone control button Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and AUX sources Note Refer to Single play Dual play for more information Using the infrared IR wireless headphones 1 Press the power control on the earpiece to turn the headphones ON 2 Select Channel A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B control on the ear piece 3 Adjust the headphone volume using the rotary dial on the earpiece Using wired headphones not included Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves 42 2008 Mark LT mi
249. nform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 272 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible If your vehicle is equipped with running boa
250. ng excess fumes The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container 296 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Refueling Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Fuel Filler Cap Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1 4 turn on off feature When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1 4 tu
251. ng the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately 5 minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occupant can still activate the Belt Minder feature When the Belt Minder feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds repeating for approximately 5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled 151 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints The Belt Minder feature uses two different warning chimes During the first minute of activation the warning chime will sound once every second The remaining warning chimes will sound twice every second while the system is activated The driver s and front passenger s safety belts are buckled The driver s or front passenger s safety belt is not buckled when the vehicle has reached at least 6 mph and 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON The driver s or front passenger s safety belt becomes unbuckled for
252. nge in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs Parking On some 4WD vehicles when the transfer case is in the N Neutral position the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of the driveline Therefore the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P Park Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position Always set the parking brake fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle 234 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer 4WD Systems 4WD when you select a 4WD mode uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case On 4WD vehicles the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the Four Wheel Drive 4WD Operation section earlier in this ch
253. ning the radio volume may be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous volume The RSS may have reduced performance or an increased chance of false detection if the tailgate is not locked and in the upright position If the tailgate is down the RSS tone may be heard intermittently or continuously The tone may also be heard if items in the truck bed protrude rearward outside the bed The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is ON An RSS control allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off To turn the RSS off the ignition must be ON and the gear selector in R Reverse An indicator light on the control will illuminate when the system is turned off If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off it may indicate a failure in the RSS The RSS will remain off until either the RSS control is pushed again or the ignition switch is recycled 227 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstac
254. nk button you wish to program located on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 3 Firmly press hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color
255. nly with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability 2 Phone When pressed the display will read NO PHONE eA 3 MENU Press repeatedly to access the following settings SATELLITE RADIO MENU if equipped Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A IV to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY Press OK to enter category mode Press A IV to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press SEEK to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SAVE SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 songs If you attempt to save a song when the system is full the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved songs and press A IV to cycle through the saved songs
256. normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 30 km of driving You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is above 50 F 10 C However if fluid is added at this time an overfill condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating temperature The transmission fluid should be in this range if at normal operating COLD Foco SL GP 7A020 CB temperature 150 F 170 F 66 C 77 C i l The transmission fluid should be in this range if at ambient temperature cotn FoMoCo 5L3P_ 7A020 CB 50 F 95 F 10 C 35 C High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range may result in transmission failure 4 An overfill condition of transmission COLD FolisGo 5L3P 7A020 CB fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter 308 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint 250 ml incre
257. not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather they could burn a small child Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them 145 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming r from until you hear a snap and feel Kk r C it latch Make sure the tongue is i e securely fastened in the buckle CA D 2 To unfasten push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle N Energy management retractors Your vehicle has a safety belt
258. ns that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child s face or neck the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle 165 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Child booster seats Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh 40 lb 18 kg and are around 4 years of age Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection these children are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly which could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until th
259. nt Systems COMP Compression Compression brings soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature ON OFF SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current CD in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current CD Press again to stop Playing MP3 discs To play an MP3 disc on your DVD system 1 Ensure that the vehicle ignition is in the RUN or ACCESSORY position 2 Ensure that the DVD system is ON 3 Insert the MP3 disc into the DVD system label side up 4 The folder track and elapsed DVD MP3 FOLDER TRACK 00 24 gt time will appear in the status bar The screen will list the Artist Title Nolno gt Album and File Name COMP Compression Compression brings soft and loud CD MP3 passages together for a more consistent listening level when in CD mode Press to turn the feature ON OFF SHUFFLE Press to hear all tracks on the current MP3 folder in random order Press again to stop SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current MP3 folder Press again to stop FOLDER LIST Press access folder mode and to go to the previous next folder in the MP8 disc MP3 disc quality factors Several factors can effect disc playback quality ELP The Onty Way mp3 COMP e Disc capacity Each disc contains about 650 MB of storage capacity We do not recommend using high capacity discs con
260. ny damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you write or call FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 813 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 270 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or call For a free publication catalog order toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be reached by their website www helminc com Ctems in this catalog may be purcha
261. o 10 savings in fuel e Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy 301 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy Slow down gradually Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in s
262. o remove it from the lamp assembly 3 Pull out the old bulb from the socket and push in the new bulb 4 Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise 81 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Windshield washer Push the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick push and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e along push and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers TILT STEERING Push the lever down to unlock the steering column While the lever is in the down position tilt the steering column to the desired position 82 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus
263. od of time open the windows at least one inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt a c electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 17 C Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use 215 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extensio
264. oid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected 188 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires
265. olvents Overspray from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and cause damage Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen Cleaning DVD and CD discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing If necessary clean discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge Do not use circular motion Compatibility with aftermarket audio systems headphone only mode When the Family Entertainment System FES detects that the original radio supplied by Ford Motor Company has been removed from the vehicle the FES will work in a state referred to as Headphone Only Mode This mode allows the FES to operate as a standalone system without interface to the radio While operating in Headphone Only Mode the system will have limited functionality e The system will only output audio to the headphones It will not be capable of providing audio to the speakers The available sources in FES Headphone Only Mode are DVD DISC and DVD AUX regardless of headphone channel A or B e When a disc is inserted into the FES while in Headphone Only Mode both headphone channels A and B will be connected to FES DISC NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a Navigation System Refer to the Navigation supplement for further information Note The navigation system which may be available on your vehicle is not equipped with THX
266. ont bumper under the grill 3 Lift the hood until the lift cylinders hold it open 281 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 4L V8 Battery Transmission fluid dipstick Air filter assembly Power steering fluid reservoir Engine oil dipstick Brake fluid reservoir Engine coolant reservoir Engine oil filler cap SO COUN Oe OU es Go BO Windshield washer fluid reservoir 282 Maintenance and Specifications WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID lt 7 Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifreeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 4 5 C use wash
267. ontrol module power Flasher relay 14 10A Back up lamp and Daytime Running Lamps DRL relay coil A C pressure switch Redundant speed control switch Heated PCV Trailer tow back up lamps relay coil ABS Reverse park aid EC mirror Navigation radio reverse input 15 5A Overdrive cancel Cluster rena seth O 246 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Passenger Compartment Fuse Location Rating Panel Description 18 10A Run Start feed Overhead power point Electrochromatic mirror Heated seats BSM Compass RSS Reverse Sensing System Restraints Air bag module OCS 20 10A Battery feed for overhead power point Cluster keep alive power 22 10A Delayed accessory power for audio power door lock switch and moon roof switch illumination RH low beam headlamp 24 15A Battery saver power for demand lamps LH low beam headlamp Horn relay PCB3 Horn power 27 5A Passenger Air bag Deactivation PAD warning lamp Cluster RUN START power SecuriLock transceiver PATS PCM 4x4 power PCM 4x4 power 31 20A Radio power Satellite radio module 32 15A Vapor Management Valve VMV A C clutch relay Canister vent Heated Exhaust Gas Oxygen HEGO sensors 11 and 21 CMCV Mass Air Flow MAF sensor VCT Electronic fan clutch Shift solenoid CMS 12 and 22 Fuel injectors and PCM power 247 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide p
268. ost 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Panel Description 35 20A Instrument cluster high beam ee nth beam headlamps 37 20A Rear power point Center console power point P89 Noted S O a ee eee are 104 PC y Notus S O 109 30A Driver power seat Adjustable pedals Memory module pedals seat mirror power 114 40A Heated backlite Heated mirror power 248 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Location Rating Panel Description 401 30A Circuit Delayed accessory power Power breaker windows Moon roof Power sliding backlite Full ISO relay Full ISO relay Full ISO relay Hi beam headlamps R06 FullSO relay Blower motor _ Fog lamps PCM Mini fuses Cartridge fuses Auxiliary relay box The relay box is located in the engine compartment on the left fender DO D02 TOE F03 R01 R02 LD a e With Daytime Running Lamp DRL or 4x4 options 249 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies gate e Without Daytime Running Lamp DRL and 4x4 options The relays are coded as follows Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Description 5A O Clockspring illumination Full ISO 4x4 CCW Relay 1 2 ISO Daytime Running Lamps DRL high beam Relay disable CHANGING THE TIRES
269. ound e 8 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height from the center of your headlamp indicated by a 3 0 mm circle on the lens to the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall 74 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 4 On the wall or screen you will observe a light pattern with a distinct horizontal edge towards the right If this edge is not at the horizontal reference line the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge is at the same height as the horizontal reference line 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on LA each headlamp then use a 4 mm we socket wrench to turn the adjuster either counterclockwise to adjust S 5 down or clockwise to adjust up AN aligning the upper edge of the light pattern up to the horizontal line 6 HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE Z 2a AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE 7 Repeat Steps 3 5 for the other headlamp 8 Close the hood and turn off the lamps TURN SIGNAL CONTROL amp p gt e Push down to activate the left turn signal e Push up to activate the right turn signal 75 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights
270. ourqns useq sey A quesse o Xe y IO p Imb I st dOIAIVS poyoodsns SI Yea V SSeTUN posueYyD IO poyxDaYO oq 0 PU JOU Op SJULIANI eso Ojfl 1OJ peyeouqny petepisuod st PUL JULIANI AKL eal I YJU S amp YIM pol ST L Ivo S PPA AMOK apnea INOA ut peddinbe ATTeurst10 adAy yuUe ood 9U PPY yeu UOLO TV 9U PUL V OS6OZN SSM UONvoyloeds pTO JO syu urImb s ayy Joour ATUO p u po uSuy Toyepuewu 4OU ST IO LOJOUT pu jq IN YJU s IO I YJU S JO asf Teuondo IT GeT suoy es 1 Ge xoq 99 prepueys IZZOTT yue ony suoy es 0 22 Jequnu 1ed pIo J0 oWweU Ied pIo i 315 Owners Guide post 2002 fmt 2008 Mark LT mit USA fus Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine SAL V8 330 Required fuel TST SESE Spark plug gap 0 040 0 050 inch 1 02 1 28mm Compression ratio 9 85 1 1The spark plug gap can not be adjusted Engine drivebelt routing e 5 4L V8 Engine 316 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO that a Safety Compliance DATE XXKX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Certification Label be affixed to a r WTAE N vehicle and prescribe where the wr tg Safety Compliance Certification AT XXX KPAX C PSLCOLD Label may be located The Safety THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL
271. oval Note The ignition key cannot be removed from the ignition unless the gearshift lever is securely latched in P Park 2 ACCESSORY allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running 3 ON all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 START cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Preparing to start your vehicle Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system This system meets all Canadian Interference Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise When starting a fuel injected engine don t press the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire 212 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door
272. ower door lock unlock disable feature All vehicle doors must be closed before beginning the procedure You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait a minimum of 30 seconds to begin again 1 Turn the ignition to the 3 ON position then press the button three times 2 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position then press the ma button three times 3 Turn the ignition to the 3 ON position the horn will chirp to indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated 4 Within five seconds press the M control two times Note Two horn chirps should be heard indicating the system has been disabled Conversely two horn chirps followed by a honk will indicate the system is enabled Pressing the power door button two times again will turn the feature ON if it was previously OFF or OFF if it was previously ON Every two consecutive presses of the ral button after successfully entering the configuration mode will change the enable disable condition of the feature 125 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 5 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position to exit programming Note After exiting the driver configuration mode the horn will chirp once to indicate a feature has been activated deactivated Car finder Press A twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lam
273. ower point is located on the instrument panel Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running in a safe manner to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods An additional auxiliary power point is located on the lower rear side of the center console The power point is accessible from the rear seats Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used Cigarette Cigar lighter if equipped 87 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Do not plug optional electrical k accessories into the cigarette lighter socket Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating this will damage the lighter element and socket The lighter will be released from
274. p The head restraint support post will hold the child seat tightly but the head restraint post is not strong enough to hold the child seat during a collision 3 Install the child safety seat tightly using the LATCH anchors or safety belts Follow the instructions in this chapter 4 Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions 175 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Attaching safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children attachments for child seat anchors Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle This type of child seat eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the tether strap must also be attached to the proper tether anchor See Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the following seating positions 8 o The anchors on both sides of the center of the rear seat are provided for child seats at the outboard seats and are further apart than the pairs of lower anchors for child seat installation at other seats DO NOT install child seats with LATCH attachments rigid or mounted on belt webbing to the lower anchors at the cen
275. pans the header area of the pickup box providing the function of a header rail e Attachment cleats from side rails or other attachments may be positioned in the front load bar to secure loads up to 600 lb 272 kg per cleat maximum of two cleats e Cleats and other attachments may be inserted through the access window located in the center of the load bar These items can then be slid to either side and secured the same way as the side rails 116 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls Cross bars Aluminum cross bars with T slot channels in all four sides and a latch mechanism that allows the end supports to snap over the existing cleats Cross bars are rated to hold loads up to 100 lb 45 kg load evenly distributed between the two crossbars and the T slots are sized to accept industry standard roof rack accessories e To remove cross bar lift handle on each side and lift end support shroud off of the cleat e To install cross bar align cleats directly across from each other on the same rail upper or lower Then place crossbar end support onto cleat and press down on each side until the latch handle cycles up and then press the handle down to secure pull up on the bars to ensure they are securely attached e To install accessories into T slots remove cross bar and turn upside down then find the slip joint end indicated with an arrow embossed on the bottom of the support
276. player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should b
277. ponent It is one of the items listed in scheduled maintenance information and is essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system For PCV valve replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as a Motorcraft or equivalent replacement part The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not used For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 312 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications JIEN UOTWROYTAED IdV U4 V 0S606CN SSM peuo 6IdS T OGMS OXO SN dSO 0 MS OX a GLOTN VSa O T X VTLTOTN asa V amp OX d S60IN dasa GTX 10 DX V G9O9IW SSM O T Wd UOTIVITJIOeds pIo Jequinu 41ed pIo Cepeuen TO IOJO W umuq Jadng OGMG AVS YLeIDIOJON TO 1030 pusld oteyyuAG UMI OSMG AVS YLeIDIOJON JUBILIqNT Yoo yT pue SUT
278. previous step to program additional remote transmitters The locks will cycle once to confirm that each remote transmitter has been programmed e When you have completed programming the remote transmitters turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position or wait 20 seconds Again the doors will lock unlock to confirm programming has been completed 128 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security lIluminated entry The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door s or sound the personal alarm The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition switch is turned to the 3 ON position or e the remote transmitter lock control is pressed or e after 25 seconds of illumination The dome lamp control must not be set to the off position for the illuminated entry system to operate The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the last door is closed even if the dimmer control is on Perimeter lighting feature The perimeter lighting feature illuminates the exterior of the vehicle in order to provide better visibility to the user while he or she approaches and enters the vehicle The perimeter lighting feature activates when e the ignition is in the 1 OFF LOCK position e the autolamp senso
279. properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases 177 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your Owner s Guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS AWD
280. ps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm Press again or turn the ignition to 2 ACCESSORY or 3 ON to deactivate Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 1 OFF LOCK position Memory seat adjustable pedals and power mirrors if equipped The remote entry system can also control the memory feature Press the control once to unlock the driver s door Pressing the ral control will automatically move the seat adjustable pedals if equipped and power mirrors to the desired memory position the memory position corresponds to the transmitter being used Activating the memory feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat adjustable pedals Gif equipped and power mirrors to the positions you desire 2 Press the SET control on the driver s seat l 3 Within five seconds press one control on the remote transmitter and then press the 1 or 2 control on the driver s seat to which you would like to associate with Driver 1 or Driver 2 positions 4 Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired Deactivating the memory feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press the SET control on the driver s door seat 126 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 2 Within five seconds press any con
281. quipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 35 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasses parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SI
282. r of gravity Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions Avoid sharp turns excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Loaded vehicles with a higher center of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions such as driving at slower speeds avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance when driving a heavily loaded vehicle Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Brake shift interlock floor shift transmission This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter If the fuse is not blown perfor
283. r determines that it is dark and e the user activates an unlock feature using either the remote keyless transmitter or the keypad The perimeter lighting feature will illuminate the headlamps and parking lamps for 25 seconds or until e the ignition is turned to any position other than the 1 OFF LOCK position or e the user activates a lock feature using either the remote keyless transmitter or the keypad Enabling disabling the perimeter lighting feature Your vehicle comes with the perimeter lighting feature enabled All vehicle doors must be closed before beginning the procedure You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait a minimum of 30 seconds to begin again 129 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 1 Turn the ignition to the 3 ON position then press the control three times 2 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position then press the 2 control three times 3 Turn the ignition to the 3 ON position the horn will chirp to indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated 4 Within five seconds press the control two times Note One horn chirp should be heard indicating the system has been disabled Conversely a horn chirp followed by a honk will indicate the system is enabled Pressing the power door A control two times again will turn the featu
284. r filter element When changing the air filter element use only the Motorcraft air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 310 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications Changing the air filter element 1 Release two retainer clamps 2 Pull air filter tray assembly out toward front of vehicle and lift air filter element up and out of housing The air filter box needs to be free of any debris before installing a new air filter 3 Install a new air filter element into the tray assembly i 4 Return air filter tray to original position by pressing firmly on the handle until all rearward movement stops and secure the two clamps ca Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used 311 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS 5 4L 3V V8 engine Air filter element FA 1754 BXT 65 650 Fuel filter FG 986B Oil filter FL 820 S PCV valve Spark plugs 1The PCV valve is a critical emission com
285. r is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information 196 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle For ad
286. r the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 190 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law PQ 99 mph 159 kr O Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a m
287. rds do not use rubber plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running board surface as the area may become slippery Exterior chrome Wash the vehicle first using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Use Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface 273 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Cleaning After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body ow gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s
288. re ON if it was previously OFF or OFF if it was previously ON Every two consecutive presses of the control after successfully entering the configuration mode will change the enable disable condition of the feature 5 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position to exit programming Note After exiting the driver configuration mode the horn will chirp once to indicate a feature has been activated deactivated KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM You can use the keyless entry k d to ip e CEE lock all vehicle doors e unlock only the driver s door e unlock all vehicle doors e program erase the customer keycode e enable disable the autolocking feature The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box is marked on the computer module and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create your own 5 digit personal entry code When pressing the controls on the keypad press the middle of the controls to ensure a good activation Programming a personal entry code To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code keypad will illuminate when pressed 2 Within five seconds press the 1 e 2 on the keypad 130 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 After t
289. re and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire LWo 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 194 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you sho
290. red 10 Volume When in Single Play press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume over all speakers When in Dual Play press to increase VOLUME A or decrease A the volume for the wired headphones Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 11 A d4_ Headphones Speakers Press once for Dual Play Headphone mode the rear speakers are muted and press again for Single Play same media playing through all speakers You can also press the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function For further interaction information refer to Single Play Dual play 12 MEDIA Press repeatedly to Rea select from the various possible playing media sources AM FM1 FM2 SAT if equipped CD DVD DVD AUX The media will show in the status display on the top of the screen when in Dual Play mode When in Single Play mode the media source will be displayed on the radio Note Channel A can access any possible media source AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Channel B can only access DVD and DVD AUX sources 45 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 13 RETURN Press to return to the playing media or to resume playback 14 MENU When playing a DVD wu press MENU once to enter the DVD disc menu if available and press twice to enter the system set up menu F
291. rential as a jacking point 8 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 9 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 10 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 11 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 12 Stow the flat tire Refer to Stowing the flat spare tire 13 Stow the jack and lug wrench Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive 14 Unblock the wheels 256 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies Stowing the flat spare tire Note Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire 1 Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing in the direction specified on the Tire Changing Instructions located with the jack hardware 2 Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the retainer through the wheel center Pull on the cable to align the components at the end of the cable 3 Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed position underneath the vehicle The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly and t
292. rn to remove it 3 Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe 4 To install the cap align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe 5 Turn the filler cap clockwise 1 4 turn until it clicks at least once If the check fuel cap light R or a check fuel cap message comes on the fuel filler cap may not be properly installed The light or message can come on after several driving events after you ve refueled your vehicle 297 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications At the next opportunity safely pull off of the road remove the fuel filler cap align the cap properly and reinstall it The check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message may not reset immediately it may take several driving cycles for the check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city and highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel cap light R or check fuel cap message on may cause the Cc light to turn on as well If you must replace the fuel filler cap replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used The fuel system may be under pressure If the fuel
293. rning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible STOP ENGINE SAFELY Displayed when the engine is overheating Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible turn off the engine If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 109 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls LOW FUEL LEVEL Displays DISTANCE TO EMPTY XXX Miles as an early reminder of a low fuel condition CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM Displayed when the electrical system is not maintaining proper voltage If you are operating electrical accessories when the engine is idling at a low speed turn off as many of the electrical loads as soon as possible If the warning stays on or comes on when the engine is operating at normal speeds have the electrical system checked as soon as possible CHECK TRACTION CONTROL Displayed when the Traction Control system is not operating properly If this message is displayed on the message center the Traction Control system will be partially operable If this warning stays on contact your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible For further information refer to Traction control in the Driving chapter LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid reservoir in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter
294. rollover personal injury or death 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction Notice to owners of the Mark LT Note Your vehicle is equipped with high performance tires When first driving the vehicle after it has been parked for a period of time you may experience a temporary ride disturbance This is a characteristic of the tires and should be no reason for concern The condition should correct itself within 5 15 miles 8 25 km of driving If the disturbance persists have the tires serviced by an authorized dealer Using your vehicle with a snowplow Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package Using your vehicle as an ambulance Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation Package 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Introduction Cell phone use The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular
295. rom the set up menu you may select from Angle Aspect Ratio Language Subtitles Disc resume Compression Restore Defaults and Back For more detailed information refer to Menu mode 15 ENTER Press to select confirm the current selection Use the cursor controls to make various selections when in any menu When not in a menu and in DVD mode press E gt to adjust the brightness A display bar will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness levels oa 16 Cursor Brightness controls Remote control Unless otherwise stated all operations can be carried out with the remote control Always point the remote control directly at the player Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player 46 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 Power control Press to turn the FES Family Entertainment System ON OFF 2 Cursor controls Use in various active menus to advance the cursor up down left right When not in a Menu the left and right cursor controls decrease and increase the display brightness 3 DISPLAY Press to access the on screen display of the FES functions and adjustments 4 RETURN Press to return to the previous menu screen 5 ANGLE DVD dependent Press to select the angle to view the scene 6 Channel A B Press to select either A or B headphones and then use the MEDIA control to select the desired playin
296. s time on this channel The system is working properly You are in a location that is blocking the SIRIUS signal i e tunnel under an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return No action required The process may take up to three minutes Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to re activate or resolve subscription issues FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The drivers primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 38 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES which allows you to listen to audio CDs MP3 discs watch DVDs and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems The DVD player is capable of playing standard DVDs CDs MP3s and is compatible with CD R W CD R and certain CD ROM media Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and controls as well as the very important safety information The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the DVD syst
297. s The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the Service engine soon C indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the Service engine soon C4 indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 304 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 3 The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened See Fuel filler cap in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the Service engine soon indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required If the Service engine soon K indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the Service engine soon C indicator on can result i
298. s and stumps You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving Map out your route before driving in the area To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling not sliding or spinning Basic operating principles e Do not use 4WD on dry hard surfaced roads Doing so will produce excessive noise increase tire wear and may damage drive components 4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice 232 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehi
299. s not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 285 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise 1 4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and
300. se to enter TEXT MODE and display the current song title While in TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the current song title artist channel category and the SIRIUS long channel name Press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels Press again to stop In CATEGORY MODE press SCAN to hear a brief sampling of channels in the selected category Press again to stop Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability In TEXT MODE sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the gt indicator is active press SEEK B gt to view the additional display text When the gt indicator is active press lt q SEEK to view the previous display text 14 AM FM Press to select Ai AM FM1 FM2 frequency band 15 ON OFF Volume Press to turn ON OFF Turn to increase decrease volume Note If the volume is set above a VOL PUSH certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on 16 CD Press to enter CD MP3 NE mode If a CD MP3 is already loaded into the system CD MP3 play will begin where it ended last 17 LOAD To load a disc into the system press LOAD Select a slot aay number using memory presets 1 6 J When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within
301. sed by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French owner s guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company 271 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Assistance To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http huww safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately i
302. shift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through four Overdrive can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the gearshift bezel D The transmission control indicator 0 D TCIL will iluminate on the instrument cluster OFF Drive not shown Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed e This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive e O D OFF lamp is illuminated e Provides engine braking 224 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving e Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O D to other gears Examples city traffic hilly terrain heavy loads trailer towing and when engine braking is required To return to O D Overdrive press the transmission control switch The O D OFF lamp will not be illuminated e O D Overdrive is automatically returned each time the key is turned off 2 Second This position allows for second gear only e Provides engine braking e Use to start up on slippery roads e To return to D Overdrive move the gearshift lever into the D Overdrive position e Selecting 2 Second at higher speeds will cause the transmission to downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed
303. should be no reason for concern Refer to Shifting to from 4L 4WD Low for proper operation 230 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driving System indicator lights e 4X4 HI Momentarily illuminates 4x4 HI when the engine is started Iluminates when 4H is selected e 4X4 LOW Momentarily 4x4 illuminates when the engine is started Illuminates when 4L is LOW selected Using the electronic shift 4WD system aH aH AL 2H 2WD High Power to the rear wheels only used for street and highway driving Provides optimal smoothness and fuel economy at high speeds 4H 4WD High Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off road situations Not intended for use on dry pavement 4L 4WD Low Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four wheels at reduced speeds Intended only for off road applications such as deep sand steep grades or pulling heavy objects 4L 4WD Low will not engage while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph 5 km h this is normal and should be no reason for concern Refer to Shifting to from 4L 4WD Low for proper operation Shifting between 2H 2WD High and 4H 4WD High e Move the 4WD control between 2H and 4H at any forward speed up to 55 mph 88 km h Note Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping Note Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages this is normal Shifting to from 4L 4WD Low 1 Bring t
304. side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 2 Select A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop 70 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Climate Controls REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER IF EQUIPPED PGY The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to defrost your rear windshield from fog and thin ice If equipped it also operates the heated mirror to remove snow and thin ice from the side mirrors Ensure that the ignition is in the ON position Press to turn the defroster ON OFF The indicator light will illuminate when activated Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty 71 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL O Rotate the headlamp control clockwise to the first position PE to turn on the parking lamps Rotate clockwise to the second position 4 to
305. specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time Function Number of Trade number bulbs Rear stop turn sidemarker tail 2 3457K lamp High mount brakelamp 1 1 Cargo lamp o 2 o a OE Map lamp o o 2 w Rear dome lamp J 1 1 License plate lamp _ _ 2 1 Exterior mounted mirror turn See your dealer 2 To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized dealer 77 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Lights Replacing exterior bulbs Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp bulbs 1 Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open the hood 2 At the top and inboard side of the headlamp peel the protective cover back from the lower screws and loosen the three retaining screws 3 Once the three retaining screws have been removed disengage the tab at the top center of the headlamp assembly by lifting it up 4 Slide headlamp assembly forward A E disconnecting the snap attachment at the fender and disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb by pulling rearward 5 Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise
306. ss and release the message center INFO button until TRIP mode appears in the display Press the RESET button to reset Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Battery voltage gauge Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the ON position If the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range have the vehicle s electrical system checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible Engine oil pressure gauge Indicates engine oil pressure The needle should stay in the normal operating range between L and H If the needle falls below the normal range stop the vehicle turn off the engine and check the engine oil level Add oil if needed If the oil Instrument Cluster NU 888886 mi TR 0000 0 NY 000000 L H L level is correct have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 17 Instrument Cluster Fuel gauge Indicates approximately how much fuel is left a 7 VN in the fuel tank when the ignition SAB is in the ON position The fuel E F gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade The arrow next to the fuel pump icon indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located For more information refer to Fillin
307. ss to cycle through video states DVD DISC DVD AUX NON DVD Off 17 EJECT Press to eject a disc from the FES 18 Fast reverse Previous When a DVD is playing press and hold for a quick reverse within the DVD Press and release for the previous chapter Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume In CD MP3 mode press to access the previous track 19 MENU Press to access the DVD disc menu for selections Press MENU again when in the DVD disc menu to access the system set up menu 20 SUBTITLE DVD dependent Press to turn the subtitle feature ON or OFF 21 LANGUAGE DVD dependent Press to select the desired language 22 ENTER Press to select the highlighted menu option 48 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 23 ILLUMINATION Press to illuminate the remote control and backlight all of the buttons Battery replacement l v Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit Since all batteries have a limited shelf life replace them when the unit fails to control the DVD player Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with the unit 49 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Headphones Wireless headphones Your FES system is equipped with two sets of battery powered infrared wireless
308. strations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Remove the jumper cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 262 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 263 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider Ford recommends your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure On 4x2 vehicles it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground without dollies and the rear wheels off the ground On 4x4 vehicles it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground If the vehicle is towed by other m
309. system equipped with energy management retractors at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions An energy management retractor is a device which pays out webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help further reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant Safety belt systems equipped with an energy management retractor must be replaced if they were in use during a frontal collision which resulted in deployment of the frontal airbags Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter The front and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts The front passenger outboard and rear outboard seat safety belts have two types of locking modes described below 146 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Vehicle sensitive mode The vehicle sensitive mode is the normal retractor mode allowing free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers The front outboard safety belts can also be made to lock manually by quickly pulling on the shoulder belt Rear safety belts Gf equipped can also be made to lock up by pulling quic
310. t Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 Connect the wired headphones in to the headphone jacks on either side of the DVD system Each side is labeled A Aor A B Headphones plugged into jack A will listen to Channel A and headphones plugged into jack B will listen to Channel B 2 Adjust the volume levels using the volume controls on the DVD system To adjust display brightness To decrease increase the brightness level on the display screen press the brightness control on the DVD system A display will appear at the bottom of the screen indicating the brightness level The brightness display will only appear when the menu is not displayed DVD player controls L D Le a 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems 1 Headphone control A B Press to select either the A or B headphone source Then press MEDIA to select the desired playing media for that headset When a headphone channel has been selected A or B selections will affect the source on that channel only Note Headphone A can access any possible media AM FM1 FM2 SAT Gf equipped CD DVD DVD AUX Headphone B can only access DVD and DVD AUX For further information refer to Single play Dual play later in this section 2 A Stop Eject Press once to stop and press a second time to eject a disc from the DVD system 3 lt
311. t USA fus Locks and Security e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the brake pedal is released and the vehicle attains a speed greater than 5 mph 8 km h The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 3 ON position and e the brake eae is released and the vehicle attains a speed greater than 5 mph 8 km h Deactivating activating autolock Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature activated There are four methods to enable disable this feature One is through your authorized dealer the second with a power door unlock lock sequence the third with the keypad and the fourth using the message center Before following the activation or deactivation procedures unlock all doors using the power door lock unlock control and ensure all vehicle doors are closed Power door unlock lock procedure You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated you must wait a minimum of 30 seconds to begin again 1 Turn the ignition to the 3 ON position then press the f control three times 2 Turn the ignition to the 1 OFF LOCK position then press the w control three times 3 Turn the ignition to the 3 ON position the horn will chirp to indicate the driver configuration mode has been activated 4 Within five seconds press fm then the control Note One horn c
312. t which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries it may also cause minor abrasions swelling or temporary hearing loss Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag cover as possible while maintaining vehicle control Several airbag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation 160 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints If the airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Determining if the system is operational at The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to Airbag readiness in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness lights will either OQ flash or stay lit
313. taining 700MB of storage e Disc type Some CD RW discs may operate inconsistently and may cause an error message to appear We recommend burning MP3 files onto CD R discs 58 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Entertainment Systems Disc finalization The disc may be left open for the purpose of adding sessions to it at a later time but be sure to close each session or the disc will not play Bit rate The player supports bit rates from 32 320 kbps as well as variable bit rate MP3 files but lower bit rates will have a noticeable effect on sound quality and are recommended only for speech or low fidelity music material We recommend that you encode MP3 files using a high quality encoder PC configuration Encoding MP3 files requires intensive use of your computer s resources Follow the PC configuration recommendations of the encoder software vendor We recommend that you avoid running other software applications on your PC during MP3 encoding to avoid undesirable noise and distortion CD MP3 and CD player care Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time Do not insert more than one disc into the slot of the CD player if equipped Always store discs out of direct sunlight Excessive heat may damage or warp discs Use care when handling and playing CD R and CD RW discs which
314. tamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may
315. ter rear seat If you install a child seat at the center rear position use the vehicle belt and the top tether anchor Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death The lower anchors for child seat installation are located at the rear section of the seat between the cushion and seat back The LATCH anchors are below the locator buttons on the seat back o Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to properly install a child seat with LATCH attachments 176 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor Try to tilt the child seat from side to side Also try to tug the seat forward Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place If the safety seat is not anchored
316. the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMVAP The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan Ford ESP coverage It provides the following e Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you purchase such as reimbursement for rentals coverage for certain maintenance and wear items e Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper to Bumper Warranty expires You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating authorized dealer There are several plans available in various time d
317. this chapter Failure to replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Safety belt usage sensors The driver and front outboard passenger safety belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the safety belts are fastened The sensors provide information to the Personal Safety System which can then adapt the airbag deployment or safety belt pretensioner activation based upon safety belt usage The Personal Safety System provides the most benefit to belted occupants The system monitors and tailors the air bag deployment based upon safety belt usage Failure to properly wear your safety belt will increase your risk of injury 149 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and right front passenger Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder To lower the shoulder belt height push the button and slide the height adjuster down To raise the height of the shoulder belt push the button and slide the height adjuster up Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce
318. ting is the maximum MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO allowable weight of the fully loaded bolts sone Sie errr aren vehicle including all options XXKKKG WITH XXXXKG WITH equipment passengers and cargo XK Fis OOOK RIS The GVWR is shown on the AT XXX KPaIXX PSLCOLD AT XXX KPaIXX PSI COLD Safety Compliance Certification THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR Label located on the B Pillar or ECT On TIE DATE or MANUFACTURE SHOIMABDVE the edge of the driver s door VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX The GVW must never exceed the De ior GVWR AEE TTT EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK INTTR TP PS R TAXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 203 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Important The towing vehicle s braking system
319. tion in 4 the 3 ON position for at least one second but no more than ten seconds 2 Turn ignition from the 3 ON G position back to the 1 OFF LOCK position in order to remove the first coded key from the ignition 3 Within ten seconds of removing the first coded key insert the second previously programmed coded key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 OFF LOCK position to the 3 ON position maintain ignition in the 3 ON position for at least one second but no more than ten seconds 4 Turn the ignition from the 3 ON position back to the 1 OFF LOCK position in order to remove the second coded key from the ignition 5 Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition and turn the ignition from the 1 OFF LOCK position to the 3 ON position maintain ignition in the 3 ON position for at least one second but no more than ten seconds This step will program your new key to a coded key 6 To program additional new unprogrammed key s repeat Steps 1 through 5 If successful the new coded key s will start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If not successful the new coded key s will not start the vehicle s engine and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat Steps 1 through 5 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized deal
320. tions e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings Distance to empty DTE Selecting this function from the INFO menu estimates approximately XXX mec TO E how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under NW 888868 mi normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for one second when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty If you RESET this warning message this display and tone will return within 10 minutes 105 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Driver Controls DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected Trip elapsed drive time Select this function from the INFO meni ey aunt TIME XX XX
321. tire next to the rim Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat 182 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure including the spare if equipped at least monthly and before long trips You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven
322. titude areas Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems try a different brand of unleaded gasoline Premium unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use Regular unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cl
323. to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the RUN or ON position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately 1 minute e Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off 3 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt nine times ending in the unbuckled state Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off e After Step 3 the restraint system warning light airbag light will be turned on for three seconds 4 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the restraint system warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled As confirmation the restraint system warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds
324. to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 866 cm away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 866 cm away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair 187 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged Safety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Av
325. treadwear patterns Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than th
326. trol on the remote transmitter which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on the driver s seat 3 Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired Replacing the battery The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF THE REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER 2 Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board STVNINYSL YS HONOLLON S ATWH Y3SHLO NO AYALLVE 3DV1d 3 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 4 Insert the new battery Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 5 Snap the two halves back together Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement 127 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security Replacing lost transmitters If a remote transmitter has been lost and you would like to remov
327. ts 165 child safety belts 2 00 00 165 Child safety seats 0 000 0 169 attaching with tether straps 173 in front seat woe 170 IM rear seat ccenn 170 Child safety seats booster SEATS cicsccsccscosesseecsresssesssncnctsessesss 166 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 275 321 Index instrument panel 00 276 INGETION vssiccsccatedss seed asire 277 plastic parts wo eee 275 Safety belts cccccceeeseeeeee 277 WASHING srpa 273 WANG sepre EnS 274 wheels ceceecsccceesseseeseseeseesenes 274 wiper blades ccccceeeeeeees 276 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating 68 Clock adjust 6 CD in dash ccc ciieieesetieenst 25 Compass electronic set zone adjustment 104 CONSOLE seieren 83 OVETHEA irosen 84 Controls POWER SCALE sesnccsscsssckushorscesedadens 137 steering column ceeeeeee 96 Coolant checking and adding 289 refill capacities 0 00 00 293 313 specifications cccceeeeeeeee 313 Cruise control see Speed control sirsiisisisrss 94 Customer Assistance 000 240 Ford Extended Service Plan 269 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada ceeees 270 Getting roadside assistance 240 Getting the service you need wie eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 265 Ordering additional owner s literature siisii en 271 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Progra enee
328. uld determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signa
329. valuable cargo 119 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Locks and Security KEYS The key operates all locks on your vehicle In case of loss replacement keys are available from your dealer You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency Refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section in this chapter for more information POWER DOOR LOCKS The power door lock controls are located on the driver and front passenger door panels Press control to unlock all vehicle doors Press control to lock all vehicle doors Smart unlocking feature The smart unlocking feature helps prevent you from locking yourself out of your vehicle With the key in any ignition position e The driver s door will automatically unlock if it is locked by the driver s power lock control while the driver s door is open The vehicle may still be locked with the key in the ignition and performing one of the following actions e Pressing the manual lock button on the door e Operating the remote entry transmitter e Operating the keyless entry keypad e Operating the driver s door with a key Autolock The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is in the 3 ON position 121 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fm
330. vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not necessarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 267 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Customer Ass
331. w coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant 291 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Maintenance and Specifications To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle Slowly turn cap counterclockwise left until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL C
332. weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE see ownens MANUAL DIMENSIONS PRESSION A FROID SE OMAERE Mall LT225 75R 16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI ee CONSULTER LE GUIDE LT225 75A 16 5E 200KPA 29 Psi OUPROPRIETAIRE T145 80016 420 KPA 60 PSI P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CARGO Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload 202 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer 2 He GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Ra
333. with the light off then followed by the restraint system warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is a 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611022 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended 155 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Safety belt maintenance Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters Gf equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collis
334. y pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tive Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see Dissimilar Spare Tire Wheel Information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges 184 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For
335. your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn Egi down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm rF When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended 185 2008 Mark LT mlt Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Tires Wheels and Loading Age Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience t
336. yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position Do not put anything on or over the airbag cover 1 Placing objects on or over the airbag cover may cause those objects to be thrown by the airbag into your face and torso or may result in a failure of the airbag to inflate properly both of which could result in serious injury Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses See your authorized dealer The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position 158 2008 Mark LT mit Owners Guide post 2002 fmt USA fus Seating and Safety Restraints Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle including frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the airbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle Additional equipment may affect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury Please refer to the Body Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate installation of additional equipment Children and airbags For additional important safety information read all information on safety restraints in this guide Chi

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Testo Coordinato Decreto Legislativo 626-94  Manuel d`Installation Du Détecteur Transpondeur RX4 Digitrax  240W  Fiche 7. Rintintin bouc-émissaire - Coordination pour l`éducation à  Gail Stacy, President Issue #32 Donna J. Hall, Editor  Fugabella® eco 2-20  Télécharger la vue éclatée  IBM Optim: Optim Common Elements Manual  Induction Cooker  MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES para las prensas transfer Secabo  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file